JP2021183003A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To realize sound game properties by suppressing improvement of a speculative property.SOLUTION: Special state completion means can complete a special state on the basis of the fact that the number of particular states counted by particular counting means reaches a specific number of times, and can perform control to a special state during a particular state based on derivation and display of a particular display result when the particular display result is derived and displayed in variation display in which a special condition is satisfied, and the particular counting means does not count a particular state because of derivation and display of the particular display result. Image processing means can generate a displacement specific image obtained by displacing a specific image disposed in a specific display layer on the basis of image data, and performance execution means can execute a specific performance for displaying a displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in a display area during variation display. For a display image of game-related information, a disposed image is disposed in a special display layer more preferentially displayed in a display area than a specific display layer.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-16

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) that is configured to change the state of the machine, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for the player who can easily win the ball, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left middle right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the number of special figure games executed in a normal gaming state (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times (special number of times), a big hit (advantageous state) does not occur (special). (Satisfaction of conditions), the game state is controlled to the probable change state, the probability that it is decided to be a big hit as a result of the special figure game is increased to about 1/100, and the big hit is likely to occur in the subsequent special figure games. It is stated that. Further, in Patent Document 1, when a big hit does not occur even if the number of special figure games (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal gaming state, a time saving state is generated instead of a probable change state. It is stated that it may be a thing.

JP-A-2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.)

However, there is room for improvement in the control of the variable display that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of executions.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the improvement of gambling and realizes sound playability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention executes a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information, and is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-17, which is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable display are executed. The update means is provided with an update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13), and the state control means is updated by the update means. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by making the numerical information obtained a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, step 100 IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100. , The part that executes step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated between the case and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100).
Moreover,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 23-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 23-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 23-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a splattering effect (specific effect). However, in such a game machine, since the effect is simply that the image is broken and scattered, the effect is improved by executing the effect in the state where other images are displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, it is necessary to create dedicated image data for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means is large. There is a problem that the image may become excessively large, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 23-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 23-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 23-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

It should be noted that the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 120IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in a feature part 120IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in a feature part 120IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the time saving loss determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 120IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing in a feature part 120IW. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in a feature part 120IW. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing after closing a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in a feature part 120IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the setting suggestion effect decision table at the time of relief. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing of the setting suggestion effect decision table at the time of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode at the time of shifting to the relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode at the time of shifting to the relief time reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closing post-processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closing post-processing in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing in the modification 6. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of the look-ahead notice effect restriction period in the modification 7. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of the control of various time saving states in the modification 8. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. It is a flowchart which shows the processing after closing a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example which concerns the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example which concerns the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demo production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the telop display execution lottery table and the telop display mode determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a time chart for explaining the control example of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the time saving rush effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the time saving rush effect in the modification 1-3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of transition of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in the modification 2. It is a timing chart which shows the timing to execute each effect in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the fanning reach in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the relief time reduction establishment notification in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control example of the gaming state in the modification 2. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a loss with a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example in an effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a layer. It is explanatory drawing of the generation of the displacement image when the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the application example of the displacement image to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table 1. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display image processing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the generated image and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a time-saving state. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the resurrection effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the crack effect image in the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the look-ahead notice effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image generated in the modification, and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop notification effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the display of the stereoscopic image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the notice effect during variable display and the development suggestion effect in a modification. It is explanatory drawing when this invention is applied to the slot machine in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead determination, etc. is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the jackpot production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 120IW)
Next, the feature portion 120IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 120IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will get a "hit" in a normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10%, while in the short time state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90%, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be used by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on the above.

Further, in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after the big hit occurs, and after the time reduction occurs, the next big hit or the time reduction occurs even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) is finished. Even if it is not done, it may be controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving).

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of (1) to (4) may be controlled differs between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are specified as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed in the time saving state, but as will be described later, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is high. Since it is configured, the time saving state is a state in which it is easy to be controlled by the small hit game state.

(Board composition)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 120IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 120IW, in the game area, the first path of the flow path through which the game ball flows is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. Of the flow paths through which the sphere flows, a second path different from the first path is mainly provided in the region on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to make the game ball flow down to the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to make the game ball flow down to the second path is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the left side of the game area, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route may be referred to as a right-handed route because the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the right side of the game area.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball striking handle 30 and driven into the game area is guided along, for example, an array of game nails when guided to the left game area. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the game ball to the left game area.

The winning ball device 6A constituting the first starting winning opening is provided as a structure in which the gaming ball divided into the left gaming area of the gaming area can enter.

As a structure in which the game ball divided into the right game area of the game area can enter, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B constituting the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning opening constituting the special winning opening A ball device 120IW17 and a special variable winning ball device 7 constituting a large winning opening are provided.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that the game ball is guided to the prize ball device 6A in the prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the winning ball device 6A, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, a game nail is provided so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 among the winning opening structures. It has been planted. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player can hit the game ball to the right. good.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the game ball hit in the right game area may enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is the game hit in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the spheres will enter them. On the contrary, the game ball hit in the left game area may enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the game area will enter them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 120IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. It is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed notification LED 120IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the feature unit 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 120IW17a is provided in the small hit game state. The special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened by moving the bottom member 120IW17a backward from the closed state in which the bottom member 120IW17a is moved forward. The game ball that has won a prize in the special winning opening is detected by the special winning opening switch 120IW24.

In this example, when a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are obtained, whereas a special variable winning ball is obtained. When a game ball wins in the ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) and is detected by the special winning opening switch 120IW24, three prize balls are obtained.

Further, the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW83 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In the feature unit 120IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the game ball winning in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is further provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. Guided by 120IW01. The guidance path 120IW01 is further branched into two paths 120IW02,03, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 120IW01 is guided to the left side path 120IW02 or the right side path 120IW03. The left route 120IW02 is a V winning opening, and the game ball winning in the V winning opening is detected by the V winning opening switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, a V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side route 120IW02 (V winning opening), and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is guided when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is in the open state. The game ball guided to the route 120IW01 enters the left route 120IW02 (V winning opening), and the V winning opening is possible. Further, when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 120IW01 enters the right side path 120IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW84 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the feature unit 120IW, when controlled to the small hit gaming state, the game ball enters the V winning opening 120IW02 during the small hit gaming state, and is detected by the V winning opening switch 120IW20A. After the end of the small hit game, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulation pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member 120IW17a. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a regulation piece, so that the game ball flowing down from the upper right to the lower left direction meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, so that the flow direction of the game ball is changed. Let it change and delay its flow time compared to the absence of regulatory pieces.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening), the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is provided on the upstream side, and the V winning opening and the discharging port are provided on the downstream side. Although the case where the V winning opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) branches into the V winning opening side and the general winning opening side, and the V winning opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side and is also general. The special winning opening switch 120IW24 may be provided on the winning opening side.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 8-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the feature unit 120IW, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, and a special winning port. The detection signal from the switch 120IW24 and the V winning opening switch 120IW20a (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a solenoid 120IW83, a signal for turning on the solenoid 120IW84, etc.), a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory, or a big prize. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the mouth door (special variable winning ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability, miss probability)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 8-4 (B) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values “1” to “6”. Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is set. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "328/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set. , The small hit probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400).

Further, regarding the loss with the time reduction, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), it is related to which of the set values "1" to "6" is used when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. There is no small hit probability, which is constant at "328/65536" (about 1/200).

On the other hand, regarding the loss without time reduction, as shown in Fig. 8-4 (A), in the case with time reduction, the case of the set value "1" is a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. The probability is the highest at "64839/65536", and the probability of losing the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", and the setting value "5" decreases in this order, and the case of the setting value "6" is lost. The probability is the lowest, "64716/65536".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the highest for the player. It is a disadvantageous setting. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "328/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is used when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. , The small hit probability is constant as "9362/65536" (about 1/7).

Further, regarding the loss with the time reduction, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), it is related to which of the set values "1" to "6" is used when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. There is no small hit probability, which is constant at "164/65536" (about 1/400).

On the other hand, regarding the loss without time reduction, as shown in Fig. 8-4 (B), in the case with time reduction, the case of the set value "1" is a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. The probability is the highest at "55805 / 65536", and the probability of losing the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", and the setting value "5" decreases in this order, and the case of the setting value "6" is lost. The probability is the lowest, "55682/65536".

As shown in FIG. 8-4, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is about 1/400, whereas the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. When executed, the small hit probability is as high as about 1/7.

(Big hit type judgment table, small hit type judgment table)
8-5 (A) and 8-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to either "6R time saving jackpot A" or "6R time saving jackpot B".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to "10R time saving jackpot".

"6R time saving big hit A" is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. The "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It should be noted that the "6R time-saving jackpot A" and the "6R time-saving jackpot B" are different from each other in the stop symbol of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be derived and displayed. The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as "6R time saving big hit A" with a probability of 70%, and 30 It is determined as "6R time saving jackpot B" with a probability of%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as "10R time saving big hit" with a 100% probability. ..

8-5 (C) and 8-5 (D) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (C) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5 (D) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to "small hit A".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. Therefore, it is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to "small hit A" or "small hit B".

"Small hit A" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 6th rounds on condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state. It is a small hit to shift to the state. "Small hit B" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 10th rounds on condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state. It is a small hit to shift to the state.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, it is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, it is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 30%. , 70% chance of being determined as "small hit B".

(Time saving type judgment table)
8-6 (A) and 8-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of time saving loss A, "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of time saving loss A, "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time reduction is lost, it is determined as "time reduction loss A" with a probability of about 33%. With a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "time reduction B", and with a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "time reduction C". Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the time reduction is lost, it is determined as "time reduction loss A" with a probability of about 33%. With a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "out of time B", and with a probability of about 33%, it is determined to be "out of time C".

(Design judgment table)
8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory views showing specific examples of the symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-7 (A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving jackpot A. Further, FIG. 8-7 (B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time saving jackpot B. Further, FIG. 8-7 (C) shows a specific example of a symbol determination table for a 10R time-saving jackpot. Further, FIG. 8-7 (D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small hit A. Further, FIG. 8-7 (E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small hit B. Further, FIG. 8-8 (F) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time saving deviation A. Further, FIG. 8-8 (G) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time saving deviation B. Further, FIG. 8-8 (H) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time saving deviation C. Further, FIG. 8-8 (I) shows a specific example of a symbol determination table for loss (no time reduction).

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the symbol determination table is a table referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol based on a random number for symbol determination according to a large hit type, a small hit type, a time saving type, and the like. Is.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the result is "6R time saving jackpot A", the symbol "3" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the case of "6R time saving jackpot B", the symbol "5" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), in the case of "10R time saving jackpot", the symbol "7" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), when the result is "small hit A", the symbol "1" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-7 (E), when the result is "small hit B", the symbol "9" is determined with a 100% probability.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (F), in the case of "time saving loss A", the symbol "6" is determined with a probability of 50%, and the symbol "8" is determined with a probability of 50%. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (G), in the case of "time saving out of B", the symbol "4" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (H), in the case of "time saving C", the symbol "9" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (I), in the case of a loss (no time reduction), the symbol "-" is determined with a 100% probability.

In addition, the specific example of the stop symbol of the special symbol is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in this example, the case where the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of one LED of 7 segments and the stop symbol of the special symbol is represented by a one-digit number is shown. However, it may be configured by two 7-segment LEDs so that the stop symbol of the special symbol is represented by a two-digit number. In this case, for example, "6R time saving big hit A", "6R time saving big hit B", "10R time saving big hit", "small hit A", "small hit B", "time saving loss B", "time saving loss C", " Even in the case of "missing (no time reduction)", a plurality of types of special symbols may be configured so that the stop symbols can be determined.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, a case is shown in which a stop symbol of a special symbol is determined using a random number for symbol determination, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol by using the random number for type determination in combination. When the type determination random number is also used, for example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "6R time saving jackpot A", the value of the type determination random number is 0 to 125 (Fig. 8-125). 5 (A)), in FIG. 8-7 (A), 0 to 125 may be allocated as the symbol determination value to configure the symbol determination table for the 6R time reduction jackpot A. Further, for example, when the time saving type is determined to be "time saving loss A", the value of the random number for type determination is 0 to 59 (see FIG. 8-6), so FIG. 8-8 (see FIG. 8-6). In F), 0 to 29 may be allocated to the symbol "6" and 30 to 59 may be allocated to the symbol "8" as the symbol determination value to configure the symbol determination table for the time saving loss A.

(Opening pattern of small hit game)
Next, the opening pattern of the small hit game will be described. FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 8-9, when 8 seconds have elapsed after starting the small hit game at the timing S1 (timing S2), the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and then 8 seconds elapse. The open state of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is continued until (see FIG. 8-9 (C)).

In the case of a small hit (small hit A, small hit B), it is set as the time before opening the special winning opening (fanfare time) from the start of the small hit game to the control of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the open state. Eight seconds are set, and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, and at the same time, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is controlled to the open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), while the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, the special winning opening is opened four times for 0.016 seconds. Therefore, in the small hit (small hit A, small hit B), the special winning opening for 0.016 seconds is opened four times during the period in which the V winning is possible.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning opening in the small hit (small hit A, small hit B) is as short as 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 Is formed with a plurality of restricted pieces, and on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, about 2 to 3 game balls meander and flow down, so that the bottom member 120IW17a even if the opening time is short. If is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball on the bottom member 120IW17a can fall into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to win a prize.

If a game ball wins in the special winning opening and wins a V, after the closing time (interval time) and small hit end time (ending time) of a predetermined period have passed after the final opening of the special winning opening is completed, a big hit The game state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state from the second round to the sixth round or the tenth round.

In this example, when the final opening of the special winning opening is completed in the small hit game, the small hit game is ended based on the lapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small hit end time (ending time). The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, detection switches capable of detecting a game ball are provided in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) at two locations, the upstream side and the downstream side, and after the final closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the upstream side. After waiting until the number of detections of the detection switch on the side and the detection switch on the downstream side match (all the winning game balls are ejected in the special winning opening), the game shifts to the small hit end time (ending time), and the small hit The small hit game may be configured to end when the end time (ending time) has elapsed.

Further, in this example, both the small hit A and the small hit B are configured so that the V prize can be won during the small hit game, but the V prize is difficult or impossible during the small hit game. The hit type may also be provided.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 120IW. Of these, FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B) show specific examples of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Further, FIGS. 8-10 (C) and 8-10 (D) show specific examples of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol. Further, FIGS. 8-10 (E) and 8-10 (F) show specific examples of a variation pattern table (for non-time reduction state) for time reduction deviation. Further, FIG. 8-10 (G) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for shortening the relief time.

First, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PT1-1 (normally) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of variation), variation pattern PT1-2 (shortened variation), variation pattern PT1-3 (normal reach), and variation pattern PT1-4 (super reach). In addition, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, either the variation pattern PT1-5 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT1-6 (super reach) is used as the variation pattern. Will be decided. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a small hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT1-7 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT1-8 (super reach). Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and the deviation occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PT2-1 (high speed) is used as the fluctuation pattern. It is decided to be out of order). Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PT2-2 (high-speed jackpot variation) is determined as the variation pattern. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a small hit occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small hit variation) is determined as the variation pattern.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (C) and 8-10 (D). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PT4-1 (normally) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of variation), variation pattern PT4-2 (shortened variation), variation pattern PT4-3 (normal reach), and variation pattern PT4-4 (super reach). Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, either the variation pattern PT4-5 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT4-6 (super reach) is used as the variation pattern. Will be decided. Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a small hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is either the variation pattern PT4-7 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PT4-8 (super reach). Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is out of alignment during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state). In the case, as the fluctuation pattern, any one of the fluctuation pattern PT5-1 (shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PT5-2 (super shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PT5-3 (normal reach), and the fluctuation pattern PT5-4 (super reach). Will be decided. In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the time reduction state (including both the first time reduction state and the second time reduction state), the variation pattern PT5-5 (variation pattern PT5-5 (including both the first time reduction state and the second time reduction state)) It is determined to be either normal reach) or fluctuation pattern PT5-6 (super reach). In addition, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if a small hit occurs during the time reduction state (including both the first time reduction state and the second time reduction state), the variation pattern PT5-7 is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be either (normal reach) or fluctuation pattern PT5-8 (super reach).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the time saving deviation (for the non-time saving state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (E) and 8-10 (F). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), in this example, when the time saving deviations A to C (designations "2", "4", "6") occur in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed. It is determined to be either pattern PT6-1 (normal variation) or variation pattern PT6-2 (time saving fanning effect).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (F), in this example, when the time saving is out of A (symbol "8") in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PT7-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be either pattern PT7-2 (time saving fanning effect) or variable pattern PT7-3 (time saving revival effect).

In this example, when the time reduction is A to C in the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the same as the deviation (no time reduction).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the relief time reduction will be described with reference to FIG. 8-10 (G). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (G), in this example, in the case of a small hit or a miss, the variation pattern PT8-1 (relief time shortening rush effect) is determined as the variation pattern. NS.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, it is decided that the normal state has a 10% probability of hitting the normal figure, and the time saving state has a 90% probability. It is decided that it will be a hit with a probability. Further, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) in the open state based on the determination that the normal symbol hit is achieved in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

(Direction control command)
8-11 and 8-12 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Variation pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any one of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command to be non-time saving. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A (symbol "8"). Command)). Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A (symbol "6"). Command)). Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation B (symbol "4"). Command)). Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command) (missing designation) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation C (symbol "2"). Command)).

Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (6R time reduction jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time reduction jackpot A. Is. Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time-saving jackpot B (display result 7 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot B designation command)). Is. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (10R time reduction jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 10R time reduction jackpot. ..

The command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (small hit A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the small hit A. .. The command 900A (H) is an effect control command (display result 10 designation command (small hit B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the small hit B. ..

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B300 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. The command B301 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. The command B402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been decremented by 1. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been decremented by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state when the time reduction is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state at the time of relief time saving.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of right-handed notification.

The command E2XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating a set setting value. The set value set in "XX" is set. For example, when the setting value is set to "1", the command E201 (H) is transmitted, and when the setting value is set to "6", the command E206 (H) is transmitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-11 and 8-12, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S2, the processes of steps S3 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the initial setting is performed in step S2, the CPU 103 performs a setting change / confirmation process (step 120IWS11). In the setting change / confirmation process, it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value command according to the currently set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and then the jackpot and the time reduction are not generated even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is achieved. Will be controlled by. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state of continuation of the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is configured not to be initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When the abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) is substantially the same as the starting winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. Further, the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) to the special symbol stop process (step 120IWS113) are substantially the same as the special symbol normal process (step S110) to the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. However, in this example, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 120IWS114). Further, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (so-called direct hit), the process proceeds to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 120IWS117).

Small hit release pre-processing (step 120IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes a process of controlling the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to the small hit opening process (step). It is updated to the value corresponding to 120IWS115) (5 in this example).

Small hit opening process (step 120IWS115): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. If the opening time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to be in the closed state, and the closing time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed and is still open. If the number of times remains, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, when the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and when the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate is closed. The 120IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, and if the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, the V winning opening flag is set. When all the opening of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed to the value corresponding to the small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS116). In this example, it is updated to 6).

Small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. When the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (7 in this example) corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 120IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110).

The jackpot opening pre-processing (step 120IWS117) to jackpot end processing (step 120IWS120) is substantially the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to jackpot end processing (step S117) shown in FIG.

In this example, when the game is determined to be a big hit and the big hit / small hit symbol is derived and displayed, or after the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the small hit game is completed, the game immediately shifts to the big hit game. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of immediately shifting to the jackpot game, the game is configured to shift to the jackpot game on the condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate (which may also be used as the passing gate 41) provided in the game area. May be good.

(Special design normal processing)
8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step 120 IWS110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 120IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter for counting the second reserved storage is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 120IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this feature unit 120IW, by executing the processes of steps 120IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. And store it in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 120IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting value command capable of specifying the currently set setting value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). In this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation every time the fluctuation display is executed is shown, but the setting value command is transmitted at the end of the fluctuation, for example, not limited to such a mode. It may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y of step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS66. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

In step 120 IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Further, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (A) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is set. When "second" is shown, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to use the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (6R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot B, 10R time-saving). The jackpot) is determined as the type of jackpot (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

On the other hand, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Select the small hit determination table for the second special symbol. Then, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on the random number for hit determination using the selected small hit determination table, and determines whether or not to make a small hit (step 120IWS67). In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) and 8-4 (B), the probability of being determined as a small hit is small at about 1/400 when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. It is determined to be a hit, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined to be a small hit with a probability of about 1/7.

When it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (C) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is selected. When indicates "second", the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (D) is selected. After selecting the small hit type determination table, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS71.

Unless it is decided to make a small hit (N in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 shifts to step 120IWS71.

In step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter for counting the number of small hits controlled during the time saving state is 0 (step 120IWS71). If the value of the small hit count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit count counter (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

When the value of the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS76.

In step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 confirms whether any of the time reduction flags is set (step 120IWS76). If neither of the time reduction flags is set, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS83. When any of the time reduction flags is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the total time reduction counter (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS82. When the count value of the total time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is to be started (step 120IWS79). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is to be started can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is not the case to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variation display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time reduction counter (step 120IWS80), and determines whether or not the count value of the second time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0. Confirm (step 120 IWS81). The CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS83 when the count value of the second time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, while it proceeds to step 120IWS82 when the count value of the second time reduction counter after subtraction is 0.

In step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS82).

In this example, a case is shown in which steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed before the count processing of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 120IWS83 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. I can't be limited. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 120IWS83. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "900" in the time reduction counter (see step 120IWS149), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display that shortens the relief time. Further, it may be configured to set "901", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction counter value (step 120IWS84). In this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS85). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 120IWS86). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS87.

In this example, since the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of the out-of-order fluctuation but also in the case of the small hit fluctuation, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction occurs. The fluctuation display may be a small hit fluctuation. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed. Therefore, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction should occur is a jackpot fluctuation, the relief time reduction is not controlled. Normal jackpot control is performed.

In step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small hit type determination table selected in step 120IWS70, and uses the type (small hit A or small hit B) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area. Is determined as the type of small hit (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the second hold storage buffer, and determines the small hit type. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined small hit type in the small hit type buffer in the RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving is lost, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for determining the time saving, and decides whether the time saving is lost. It is determined whether or not (step 120 IWS88). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200. (See FIG. 8-4 (A)). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400 (). See Figure 8-4 (B)). If it is not decided to be out of time (if it is decided to be out of time), the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off (Y in step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time reduction type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (A) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is set. When "second" is shown, the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving loss A, time saving loss B, time saving loss C) corresponding to the value matching the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the time saving type (step). 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

When the process of step 120IWS91 is completed, the CPU 103 selects a symbol determination table (see FIGS. 8-7 (A) to 8-8 (H)) according to the result of the type determination performed in step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92). ). In the case of a loss without a time reduction, the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (I) is selected as it is, and the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

In step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines the symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the symbol determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step 120 IWS111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) confirms whether or not the story has been set (step 120 IWS1701). In addition, the story is a fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time according to the number of fluctuations of the symbol, and whether or not the story has been set is set with flags and data set according to the story when a big hit occurs. Check if it is.

If the story has already been set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table for relief time reduction (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set, or if the rescue time reduction determination flag has not been set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction is off (step 120IWS1704). If the time reduction is not missed, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, the game state, and the display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. .. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is a relief time reduction, if the story is not set, the variation pattern for the normal use is uniformly determined instead of the variation pattern for the relief time reduction.

If the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag (see step 120IWS150, step 120IWS160, and step 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). When the time saving flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, the game state, and the display result (step 120IWS1709), and steps. Move to 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if it is determined that the time reduction is off, the same fluctuation pattern as the time reduction (no time reduction) is determined when the time reduction state is in effect.

If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the symbol "8" is determined in the symbol determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the symbol "8" is not set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10 (E)) for time saving deviation (other than the symbol "8") (step 120IWS1707), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. When the symbol "8" is used, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) for the time saving deviation (symbol "8") (step 120IWS1708), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, S1709 and the random number for determining the variation pattern stored in the hold storage buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer. , Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 8-10 is used (step 120IWS1710). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 120IWS1712), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 120IWS1714).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, and then decides whether or not to make a small hit, if it has not been transmitted yet. As a result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command ~ Control is performed to transmit the display result 10 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). ). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1126, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the right-handed LED 120IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 120IWS1127). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

On the other hand, when the relief time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of the time reduction (step 120IWS1129). It should be noted that whether or not the case is determined to be out of time can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 120IWS93.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1131, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 120IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, and the time saving flag C is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets the definite display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the symbol determination period timer for measurement (step 120IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the symbol determination period timer for this purpose (step 120IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

Unless it is decided to be out of time (N in step 120IWS1129), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0". Set the value according to ".5 seconds" (step 120IWS1137). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). .. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
8-19 to 8-21 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 120IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 120IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the time reduction flag (time reduction flag A, time reduction flag B, time reduction flag C) and the number of times of execution of the variation display during the time reduction state if it is set. The time reduction counter is reset (step 120 IWS134).

As the time reduction counter, a special 2 time reduction counter corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol and a total time reduction counter corresponding to the number of fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. ing. When simply referred to as "time reduction counter", it indicates both the special 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and even if the fluctuation display of 900 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 120IWS135, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit and the initial setting is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148. If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the value is set, the CPU 103 resets the small hit count counter, the total time reduction counter, and the special 2 time reduction counter (step 120IWS144), and controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS145). ). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS148.

In this example, the process of steps 120IWS141 to S147 is executed to shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification in the time saving final variation. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-handed notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets "900" for the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" for the total time reduction counter, "900" for the relief time reduction counter, and the small hit count counter. Is set to "1" (step 120IWS149). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS151). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

In this example, even if there is a small hit fluctuation, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the end of the symbol determination period, step 120IWS150 is executed, and in the subsequent small hit game state, the time reduction state is executed. It is controlled by C.

If the relief time reduction flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to be out of the time reduction (step 120IWS152). It should be noted that whether or not the case is determined to be out of time can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 120IWS93.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not any of the time reduction flags (time reduction flags A to C) is set (step 120IWS153). If neither of the time reduction flags is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the special 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter if the time reduction is out of A (Y in step 120IWS154). Each of the counters is set to "900" (step 120IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS 160.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the special 2 time reduction counter and "900" in the total time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 120IWS156) (step 120IWS157). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS 160.

If it is not the time reduction B (N in step 120IWS156), that is, if it is the time reduction C, the CPU 103 sets "30" in the special 2 time reduction counter and "900" in the total time reduction counter (step). 120IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS 160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, when "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the time reduction, and the next big hit or the time reduction does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times after the time reduction is performed. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to subtract 1 from the small hit count counter (step 120IWS162) and transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

If any of the time reduction flags is set (Y in step 120IWS153), the process proceeds to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, even if the time reduction is lost, if the time reduction state is in progress, a new time reduction state is not set based on the time reduction deviation, and the current time reduction state is continued (hence, therefore). The values of the special 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter continue to be the current values).

In step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS164). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening time timer (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag if it is set (step 120IWS170).

In step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Pre-processing for small hit opening)
FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening pre-processing (step 120 IWS 114) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening pre-opening time timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the time timer before opening the special winning opening has not timed out (that is, the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends as it is.

If the time before opening the special winning opening time timer has timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state. (Step 120 IWS 402). Further, the CPU 10103 sets a value corresponding to the first opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) of the special winning opening in the opening time timer (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Processing during small hit opening)
FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (step 120 IWS 115) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control to transmit (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on (step 120IWS423). If the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a V winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control to transmit (step 120IWS424). Further, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the V winning has been done (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 has come (step 120IWS426). Whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 has been reached is determined by, for example, the time after the timer is set when the small hit game is started and the small hit game is started (in this example). , 8 seconds) can be determined by confirming whether or not it has been reached. When the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 to the open state (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 has come (step 120IWS428). Whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is determined by, for example, setting a timer when the opening of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is started, and starting the opening of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the time from the time has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). When the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 120IW20 to the closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (that is, if the special winning opening is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 120IWS431), and the value of the open time timer after the subtraction is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is 0 (step 120 IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the closed state (step 120IWS433). Further, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined closing time (a value corresponding to the interval time (step 120IWS434) in the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after opening the special winning opening, and ends the process.

If the opening time timer is 0 in step 120IWS430 (that is, if the special winning opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the closing time timer value (step 120IWS435), and the value of the closing time timer after the subtraction. It is confirmed whether or not is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the closing time timer is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not all the special winning openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special winning opening has already been opened four times, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS437, and the process proceeds to step 120IWS440.

If all the special winning openings have not been opened (that is, if the 2nd to 4th opening remains), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and opens the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. (Step 120 IWS438). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) in the closing time timer (step 120IWS439). Then, the process is terminated.

If all the special winning openings have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440). ).

(Post-processing after closing the small hit)
FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit closing post-processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS453. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer the time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 120IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter if it is set (step 120IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 120IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big winning opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

When it is confirmed that the V winning flag is not set in the process of step 120IWS456, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 120IWS461). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). Then, if set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 120IWS463), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS464). ..

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step 120 IWS121) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS535. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit flag or the small hit flag (step 120IWS532), and controls to send the big hit end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 120IWS534), and performs processing. finish.

In step 120 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A (step 120IWS537) and confirms whether or not the relief time saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). When the relief time reduction flag is set, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated. be. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction flag (step 120IWS539), sets "1" in the special 2 time reduction counter, sets "99" in the total time reduction counter, and sets "1" in the small hit count counter. Is set (step 120 IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, when the relief time saving flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not it is a big hit generated in the time saving state (step 120IWS541). Whether or not the jackpot has occurred in the time-saving state is determined by, for example, whether the time-saving flag is set before the processing of step 120IWS134 or step S120IWS456 is executed at the start of the big-hit game and the time-saving flag is reset. Check whether or not, and if the time saving flag is set, the big hit time saving flag indicating that the time saving state was set at the time of the big hit is set, and in step 120IWS541, whether or not the big hit time saving flag is set. Can be determined by checking.

In the case of a big hit that occurred in the time saving state, the CPU 103 sets "7" in the special 2 time saving number counter, sets "99" in the total time saving number counter, and sets "1" in the small hit number counter. (Step 120 IWS 540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If it is not a big hit that occurred in a time-saving state (a big hit that occurred in a normal state), it is confirmed whether or not the finished big hit game state is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (step 120IWS543). .. It should be noted that whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the finished big hit game state is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets "1" in the special 2 time reduction counter, sets "99" in the total time reduction counter, and sets the total number of small hits. Set the counter to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the finished jackpot game state is not based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets "99" in the special 2 time reduction counter and totals. “99” is set in the time reduction counter, and “1” is set in the small hit counter (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed by executing the above processing, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the time saving state is changed to one time saving number. It is controlled (see step 120IWS544), and if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, it is controlled to the time saving state with 7 times of time saving (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving state (in this example, the time saving) is more advantageous when the big hit is made during the time saving state than when the big hit is made during the normal state. It is controlled by many times).

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the time reduction state is controlled to 99 times of time reduction (see step 120IWS545), and the big hit is performed during the time reduction state. If this happens, the time reduction is controlled to 7 times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is more advantageous to have a big hit during the normal state than to have a big hit during the time saving state (in this example, the time saving state). It is controlled by many times).

Further, in this example, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, the time reduction number of times 1 It is controlled to the time saving state of the times (see step 120 IWS540). Therefore, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, the time reduction of the one with the lower advantage is achieved. It is controlled by the state (in this example, the number of time reductions is as small as 1).

In addition, for example, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit fluctuation, when a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, it is the second special symbol. If the V prize is won by the small hit fluctuation based on the fluctuation display of the above, it may be configured to be controlled to the time saving state (hence, the time saving state with high advantage) of 99 times of time saving.

(state change)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 120IW will be described. FIG. 8-26 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 120IW. As shown in FIGS. 8-26, in the normal state, when a big hit occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). Further, even if the pattern is out of order in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving outlier) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 120IWS160). Furthermore, even if the time is lost, the number of fluctuations has reached 900 times without the next big hit or time reduction after the RAM clear processing, big hit or time reduction. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (see step 120IWS150).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state A, when a big hit occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled again (see step 120IWS537). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state A, if a small hit occurs, the control is controlled to the small hit state (see step 120IWS69), and if a V prize is won in the small hit state, the big hit is passed. Then, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see step 120IWS537). Further, in the time saving state A, even if the time saving state A is out of order, if the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) (see step 120IWS160). Further, in the time saving state A, even if a small hit does not occur, it is controlled to the normal state when the variation display of the second special symbol of 1, 7, or 99 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit. (See steps 120IWS82, S143). Further, in the time saving state A, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state B, when a big hit occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). Further, in the time saving state B, when a small hit occurs, the small hit state is controlled (see step 120IWS69). Further, in the time saving state B, even if a small hit does not occur, the normal state is restored when the variation display of the second special symbol of 30, 50, 100, and 200 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit. It is controlled (see steps 120IWS82, S143). Further, in the time saving state B, even if the time saving state B is out of order, if the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) (see step 120IWS160). Further, in the time saving state B, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time saving state C, when a big hit occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). Further, in the time saving state C, when a small hit occurs, the small hit state is controlled (see step 120IWS69). Further, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state C is controlled again (see step 120IWS150). Further, in the time saving state C, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times, the time saving state C is controlled again (see steps 120IWS149,150). Further, in the time saving state C, when a small hit occurs once, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

If a small hit is obtained in the time saving state A but the V is not won, the time saving state A is continued as it is after the small hit game is completed. Further, if a small hit is obtained in the time saving state B but the V is not won, the time saving state B is continued as it is after the small hit game is completed. Further, if a small hit is obtained in the time saving state C but the V is not won, the time saving state C is continued as it is after the small hit game is completed.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-27 to 8-28 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 120IWS613). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 120IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 120IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 120IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS618). ).

The received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation. If it is a B designation command, a second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 120IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets the large winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received effect control command is a V winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the V winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 120IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 has a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 120IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time reduction state A designation command (step 120IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, a sunset state) corresponding to the time reduction state A (time reduction state via a jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) (step 120IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time reduction state B designation command (step 120IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time reduction state via a time reduction loss) corresponding to the time reduction state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) (step 120IWS636).

If the received effect control command is the time saving state C designation command (step 120IWS637), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is set with the special effect mode flag indicating that the effect mode is set to the special effect mode. Is confirmed (step 120 IWS638). When the special effect mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 switches to a background image (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the mandarin orange field mode) according to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). Control is performed (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, when the special effect mode flag is set, the image display device 5 controls to switch to the background image according to the special effect mode (for example, the red background image according to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640). ..

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 120IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to store the set value in the set value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 120IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS644). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a symbol that is out of time is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see step 120IWS1126, S1131). At the beginning of the symbol determination period, the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 is turned on.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 120IWS645), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS646), and executes the left-handed notification effect. Start (step 120 IWS647).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 120IWS648). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 120IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 120IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 120IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 120IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 120IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control CPU 120 when the received display result specification command indicates "big hit" or when the received display result specification command indicates "small hit". Determines a combination of decorative symbols (large hit symbol, small hit symbol) in which three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. In this example, the case where the combination of the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are the same for both the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is determined, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the received display result designation command indicates "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 is configured to determine the combination of the decorative symbols of "135" as the stop symbol as the small hit symbol. You may.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) may be determined according to the time saving type.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) that reminds us of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is the variation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) that specifies the relief time saving rush effect. (Step 120IWS803). In the case of the variation pattern PT8-1, the effect control CPU 120 has the set value specified by the set value command (the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 120IWS642)). It is confirmed whether or not the setting is any of "4" to "6" (step 120IWS804). If the setting value is neither of the settings "4" to "6", the process proceeds to step 120IWS808.

When the set value is any of the settings "4" to "6", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a relief setting effect depending on which of the set values "4" to "6". The type is determined (step 120IWS805). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the relief time setting effect (step 120IWS806). If it is decided not to execute the relief setting effect, the process proceeds to step 120IWS808. When it is decided to execute the relief time setting effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the special effect mode flag (step 120IWS807), and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

In step 120IWS808, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including the relief time setting suggestion effect when it is determined to execute the relief time shortening rush effect and the relief time setting suggestion effect (step 120IWS808). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814.

On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is not the fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is used. Check whether it is the variation pattern PT6-2 (see FIG. 8-10 (E)) that specifies the time-saving fanning effect or the variation pattern PT7-2 (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) that specifies the time-saving fanning effect. (Step 120 IWS809). In the case of the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the time-saving fanning effect (step 120IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is not the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 specifies the time saving restoration effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is 3 (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) (step 120IWS811). In the case of the variation pattern PT7-3, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the time saving restoration effect (step 120IWS812). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814. If it is not the variation pattern PT7-3, the effect control CPU 120 selects a normal process table according to the variation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS814.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812, and step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS815). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 120IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 120IWS816).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 120IWS817).

(Relief setting suggestion production decision table)
FIG. 8-30 is an explanatory diagram of the relief setting suggestion effect determination table used in step 120IWS805 of FIG. 8-29 when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)). be.

As shown in FIG. 8-30, in the relief time setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is the setting "4", the selection ratio without the relief time setting suggestion effect is 50%, and the selection of the relief time setting suggestion effect A is selected. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is 40%, the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect B is 5%, and the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect C is 5%.

When the set value is set to "5", the selection ratio without the relief setting suggestion effect is 30%, the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect A is 10%, and the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect B is 50. %, Judgment values are assigned so that the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is 10%.

When the set value is the setting "6", the selection ratio without the relief setting suggestion effect is 10%, the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect A is 15%, and the selection ratio of the relief setting suggestion effect B is 15. %, The determination value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that if the relief setting suggestion effect A is executed, it is highly likely that the setting value is set to "4", and if the relief setting suggestion effect B is executed, the setting value " It is suggested that there is a high possibility that it is set to "5", and it is highly likely that it is set to the set value "6" if the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is executed.

The relief time setting suggestion effect is a suggestion effect of the set value executed when the relief time shortening rush effect is executed in the image display device 5.

In this example, the relief setting suggestion effect is configured to be executable when the setting values "4" to "6" are set, so the relief setting suggestion effect is set to a relatively high setting. It is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that it is done.

(Variable display effect processing)
8-31 and 8-32 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect process (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 120IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 120IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and right-handed. Select the process table according to the notification (step 120IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS867.

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 120IWS851). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation effect (the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 120IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS854). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS867.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 120IWS861). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed C command reception flag or the second confirmed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 120IWS861), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 120IWS862), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 120IWS863). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 120IWS865). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 120IWS866). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS867.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the process shifts to the processing after step 120IWS862 to shift to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS862 and the process does not shift to the processing after step 120IWS862.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
8-33 and 8-34 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 120IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 120IWS871). Step 120 IWS872). If the value of the final effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 120IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). In accordance with n), control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed (step 120IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (non-time-saving missed symbol, time-saving missed symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol). Step 120 IWS879).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the process is terminated.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit stop flag indicating that the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the execution of the V winning promotion effect for promoting the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening (step 120IWS883B), and ends the process.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 120IWS885A). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 120IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the jackpot setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the set value command (the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 120IWS642)). (Step 120 IWS886).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the big hit medium effect according to the presence / absence of the big hit setting suggestion effect and its type (step 120IWS887). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 120IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 120IWS889).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step 120IWS890).

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small hit stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 120IWS892). It should be noted that whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small hit start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 120IWS894). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 120IWS895), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 120IWS896).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 120IWS897).

If the small hit stop flag is not set (that is, when the non-time saving missed symbol or the time saving losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start waiting process (that is, when the time reduction loss symbol is stopped and displayed). The value is updated according to step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Big hit setting suggestion production decision table)
FIG. 8-35 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot setting suggestion effect determination table used in step 120IWS886.

As shown in FIGS. 8-35, in the jackpot setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set "1", the selection ratio without the jackpot setting suggestion effect is 65%, and the selection of the jackpot setting suggestion effect A is selected. The ratio is 10%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect B is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is. The determination value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the above is 5% and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%.

When the set value is set to "2", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 65%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 10. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is set to "3", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 65%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 10%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is set to "4", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 60%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 15%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is set to "5", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 60%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 15%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 15%. The judgment value is assigned so that is 5%.

When the set value is the setting "6", the selection ratio without the big hit setting suggestion effect is 60%, the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect A is 5%, and the selection ratio of the big hit setting suggestion effect B is 5. %, The selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is 5%, the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%. The determination value is assigned so that is 15%.

Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the set value is set to "1" if the jackpot setting suggestion effect A is executed, and if the jackpot setting suggestion effect B is executed, the setting value is set. It is suggested that the value is relatively high to be set to "2", and it is suggested that it is relatively likely to be set to the set value "3" if the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is executed. If the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is executed, it is suggested that the setting value is relatively likely to be set to "4", and if the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is executed, the set value is "5". It is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "6", and it is suggested that the setting value "6" is relatively high if the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is executed.

The jackpot setting suggestion effect is a suggestion effect of the set value executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the relief time reduction rush effect and the relief time setting suggestion effect when shifting to the time reduction state C, which is the relief time reduction, will be described. 8-36 to 8-37 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the time saving state is entered. In FIGS. 8-36 to 8-37, the effect screens are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C), ... (G).

As shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), it is assumed that the variation display of the decorative symbol 120IW100 is started before one variation of the variation display that shifts to the relief time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 8-36 (B), when the variable display of the decorative symbol 120IW100 is started, the relief time saving rush effect is started. In the relief time saving rush effect, first, the rushing suggestion display 120IW105 suggesting the rushing into the relief time saving is displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol 120IW100, and the relief time saving rushing effect is started. After that, in the relief time saving rush effect, the decorative symbol 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1) is operated (pressed) is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 120IW106, the character "press" is displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (D), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 120IW106, "V". The character display 120IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction starts. In addition, a right-handed instruction display 120IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Further, when the execution of the relief time setting suggestion effect is determined, the relief time setting suggestion effect is executed, and the set value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting the set value is displayed at the lower right of the screen. This suggests that the set value is one of the settings "4" to "6".

For example, when the relief time setting suggestion effect A is executed, the set value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in a blue display color, and when the relief time setting suggestion effect B is executed, the set value suggestion is displayed in a green display color. When the display 120IW200 is displayed and the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in a red display color, and the display color of the setting value suggestion display is displayed according to the type of the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief. It may be configured to be different.

Further, not limited to such an aspect, for example, a triangular setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed when the relief setting suggestion effect A is executed, and a diamond shape is displayed when the relief setting suggestion effect B is executed. Setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when the setting suggestion effect C at the time of relief is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 of a star shape is displayed, and the setting value suggestion display is displayed according to the type of the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief. It may be configured so that the display shape is different.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 8-36 (D). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process for whether or not a big hit is achieved and a variation pattern type in the start winning determination process (step S101), and makes a look-ahead determination. Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 8-36 (D) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, there is a high ratio that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 8-10 (B)). ), Therefore, the variable display is digested extremely quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36 (D) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36 (D) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

If the fluctuation that reaches the relief time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is secured, and the same effect as in FIGS. 8-36 is performed to temporarily reduce the relief time. After executing the effect, the effect of notifying the big hit may be executed.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 120IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. No. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol one time before, and various modes can be considered.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed when the relief time is shortened and the pseudo hold continuous effect is executed is shown. It may be configured to execute the setting suggestion effect even when the setting suggestion effect is executed, or it may be configured not to execute the setting suggestion effect when the hold continuous effect is executed due to a big hit. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed when the hold continuous effect is executed as a big hit, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different from the case where the relief time is shortened, and the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect. May be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), the mode selection screen 120IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When the predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically confirmed. Further, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. In addition, the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief is continuously executed, and the set value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on the screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (F), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 120IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief time reduction rush" are displayed. At this time, the small symbol 120IW101 stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (G), and when the next fluctuation is started, the time saving state C is entered and the relief time saving is started. At this time, the background image is changed to the background image (red) for the special effect mode.

In this example, the relief time reduction rush effect is executed before one change that rushes into the relief time reduction, but before the change, the remaining rotation speed until the relief time reduction, the explanation of the effect in the relief time reduction, and the countdown. It may be displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed in a variable display in which the relief time is shortened, but the symbol confirmation period is normally 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear processing is executed, when the jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is lost is shown. Or, when it is configured to execute a story (such as whether to make it fluctuate at high speed), it may be configured to clear the selection buffer and the story counter of the story. Further, it may be configured so that a story can be set when the relief time is activated, or a different story can be set according to the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, a case is shown in which the time saving state A via the big hit, the time saving state B via the time saving loss, and the time saving state C via the relief time saving continue until one small hit occurs uniformly. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on whether the time saving state A via the big hit, the time saving state B via the time saving loss, or the time saving state C via the relief time saving occurs, the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur. It may be configured. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether the time saving state A via the big hit, the time saving state B via the time saving loss, or the time saving state C via the relief time saving occurs. 1 will be described.

FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20. In the first modification, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" for the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" for the total time reduction counter, and the relief time reduction counter. Is set to "900" and "2" is set to the small hit count counter (step 120IWS149X). The processes after step 120 IWS150 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 8-20.

By executing the above processing, in the modified example 1, in the case of the time saving state A via the big hit and the time saving state B via the time saving loss, the time saving state is continued until one small hit occurs. In the case of the time saving state C via the relief time saving, the time saving state is continued until two small hits occur.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even in the case of the time saving state A via the big hit and the time saving state B via the time saving loss, the time saving state is continued until a different number of small hits occur. It may be configured as. Further, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C via the relief time saving, the time saving state is continued until the small hit occurs twice, but the time saving state is continued until another number of times such as three small hits occur. May be configured to continue.

(Modification 2)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, the case where the subtraction processing of the small hit number counter (see steps 120IWS71 to S75) is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation is shown, but the processing mode is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, the subtraction process of the small hit number counter may be executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation. Hereinafter, a modification 2 in which the subtraction process of the small hit number counter is executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation will be described.

FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing in the second modification. In the second modification, the processing of steps 120IWS451 to S463 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). If the value of the small hit count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit count counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

When the value of the small hit count counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the set time saving flags (time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS464.

The process of step 120IWS464 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 8-24.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, when the relief time is shortened, the case where the time is uniformly controlled at the end of the symbol determination period is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the variation display for the relief time is small. In the case of a hit variation, it may be configured to control the time saving state at the end of the small hit game. Hereinafter, a modification 3 will be described in which, when the variation display that shortens the relief time is a small hit variation, the variation is controlled to the time reduction state at the end of the small hit game.

FIG. 8-40 is a flowchart showing the processing after closing the small hit in the modified example 3. In the third modification, even if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in step 120IWS148 in the special symbol stop processing, the processing of steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed if the small hit flag is set. ..

In the third modification, the processing of steps 120IWS451 to S462 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 120IWS462A). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag that has been set (step 120IWS462B). Further, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" in the total time reduction counter, "900" in the relief time reduction counter, and "1" in the small hit number counter (step). 120IWS462C). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS462D). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS464.

The process of step 120IWS464 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 8-24.

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, when the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated. Although the case of controlling to the time saving state (the time saving state of one time saving number of times) having the lower advantage is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to control to a time saving state having a lower advantage (for example, a time saving state with 7 times of time saving). Hereinafter, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is terminated, the time reduction with the higher advantage is achieved. A modification 4 for controlling the state (time saving state with 7 times of time saving) will be described.

FIG. 8-41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process in the modified example 4. In the modified example 4, in the jackpot end processing, the processing of steps 120IWS531 to S539 is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 8-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets "7" in the special 2 time reduction counter, "99" in the total time reduction counter, and sets "1" in the small hit number counter (step 120IWS540X). The processes of steps 120IWS541 to S541 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-25.

In the modified example 4, when the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation by executing the above processing, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transferred big hit game is performed. When it ends, it is controlled to the time saving state of 7 times (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, considering the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the big hit is transferred. When the game is ended, it is controlled to the time saving state (in this example, seven time saving states in which the number of time saving is more than one), which has a higher advantage. On the other hand, when considering the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is a small hit variation, a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the transition is made. When the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled to the one with the lower advantage (in this example, the time saving state of 7 times, which is less than 99 times).

(Modification 5)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, after the relief time is shortened, if the variation display of 900 times is completed without any big hit or small hit even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the relief time is shortened again. (Relief time reduction loops) has been shown, but not limited to such a mode, the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction may be configured to end once. Hereinafter, a modified example 5 in which the time saving state C via the relief time saving is temporarily terminated will be described.

FIG. 8-42 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, in the special symbol normal processing, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S85 is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16. In the modification 5, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time reduction flag C is set (that is, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction counter. Is set to "900" (step 120 IWS85B). The processes after step 120 IWS86 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-16.

FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, in the special symbol stop processing, the processing of steps 120IWS to S148 is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20. In the modification 5, when the relief time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" for the special 2 time reduction counter, "900" for the total time reduction counter, and a small hit. Each "1" is set in the count counter (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in the modification 5, the relief time reduction counter is not performed at the end of the variation display in which the relief time reduction has occurred. The processes after step 120 IWS150 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-20 and 8-21.

By executing the above processing, in the modified example 5, the relief time reduction count counter is not set at the end of the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs, and then a big hit or a small hit is performed during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction. When the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without the above result, the relief time reduction counter is set. Therefore, in the modified example 5, after the relief time is shortened, even if the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without any big hit or small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the time reduction state C is temporarily terminated. However, the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 6)
In the above modification 5, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 when the relief time is shortened. Therefore, during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS83 in the special symbol normal processing. Step 120 The subtraction process of the relief time reduction counter in IWS84 is not executed. It should be noted that the subtraction process of the relief time reduction counter may be executed even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction. Hereinafter, a modification 6 in which the subtraction process of the relief time reduction counter can be executed even during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction will be described.

FIG. 8-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing in the modification 6. In the modified example 6, in the special symbol normal processing, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S82 is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16. In the modification 6, then, there is no determination process of the value of the relief time reduction counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 directly subtracts the value of the relief time reduction counter by 1 (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is smaller than 0 (that is, a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is smaller than 0, the CPU 103 sets "0" in the relief time reduction counter (step 120IWS84B). Then, the process proceeds to step 120 IWS87.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not less than 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time reduction flag C is set (that is, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction counter. Is set to "900" (step 120IWS84E). The processes after step 120 IWS86 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 8-16.

By executing the above processing, in the modified example 6, as in the modified example 5, the relief time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variation display in which the relief time reduction occurs, and then the time reduction via the relief time reduction is performed. When the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit or a small hit during the state C, the relief time reduction counter is set. Therefore, in the modified example 6, after the relief time is shortened, even if the fluctuation display of 900 times is completed without any big hit or small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction, the time reduction state C is temporarily terminated. However, the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 7)
In the above-mentioned modification 5 and modification 6, the look-ahead notice effect may be further configured to be feasible. Then, the look-ahead notice effect may be restricted in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the end of the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction. Hereinafter, a modification 7 for limiting the look-ahead notice effect in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the end of the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction will be described.

In the modification 7, in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process process, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is a big hit or a small hit. , Whether or not the time reduction is missed, the pre-reading judgment of the big hit type, the small hit type, the time reduction type, the fluctuation pattern type, etc. is performed. Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the pre-reading determination result designation command capable of specifying the pre-reading determination result to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received pre-reading determination result specification command in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process, and displays the variation of the advance notice target. Control is performed to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect over one or a plurality of variable displays before the execution.

FIG. 8-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the look-ahead notice effect limiting period in the modified example 7. As shown in FIGS. 8-45, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction loss after the relief time reduction counter is set, the relief time reduction occurs and the time reduction state C is controlled. NS. Next, when the variation display of 900 times is completed without becoming a big hit or a small hit during the time reduction state C via the relief time reduction (that is, when counting after the relief time reduction counter is set, the 1800th variation display is displayed. (When finished), the time saving state C is finished.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 limits the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the end of the time saving state C. In this example, since the upper limit of the total number of reserved storages is 8, the predetermined period from the fluctuation display before the 8 fluctuations before the end of the time reduction state C to the relief time reduction, and the time reduction state C after the relief time reduction is reached. The execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted over a specific period until the change display after 8 changes after the end. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 8-45, when counting after the relief time reduction counter is set, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined from the 1792th variation display to the 1808th variation display.

The "restriction on the look-ahead notice effect" may be controlled so that the look-ahead notice effect is not executed at all, the execution probability of the look-ahead notice effect is lowered, or a part of the plurality of types of the look-ahead notice effect is executed. It may be possible to execute only the type of look-ahead notice effect.

(Modification 8)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW and each modification, the control to a plurality of time saving states may be configured to be able to be executed in parallel at the same time. FIG. 8-46 is a timing chart showing the timing of control of various time saving states in the modified example 8. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-46, when the big hit game state is finished (timing T1), the case where the time saving state A is shifted to the time saving state A with 99 times of time saving is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, occurrence of time saving deviation) is satisfied at the continuous timing T2 of the time saving state A. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time reduction state A, the control of the time reduction state B (in this example, the number of time reductions is 30 times) based on the time reduction deviation is newly started. Will be done. Then, when the variation display of 30 times is completed (timing T3), the control to the time saving state B is terminated. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-46, since the variation display of 99 times has not been completed at the stage of timing T3, the control of the time saving state A is continued. In the period from timing T2 to T3, the time saving state A control processing and the time saving state B control processing are executed in parallel in terms of internal processing, but the time saving state is apparently the same. Looks like it's continuing.

Next, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of the time saving deviation) is satisfied at the continuous timing T4 of the time saving state A. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time reduction state A, the control of the time reduction state B (in this example, the number of time reductions is 30 times) based on the time reduction deviation is newly started. Will be done. Then, at the timing T5 before the end of the 30-time variation display, the 99th variation display is ended after being controlled by the time-saving state A, and the control to the time-saving state A is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-46, since the variation display of 30 times has not been completed at the stage of timing T5, the control of the time saving state B is continued. Then, when the variation display of 30 times is completed (timing T6), the control to the time saving state B is terminated. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time saving state A is ended at the timing T5 after the big hit game is finished, but the control of the time saving state B is also executed in parallel, so that 99 after the big hit game is finished. It seems that it was controlled in a reduced working hours state over times.

(Modification 9)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, by determining Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, even if the time reduction is lost, the relief time is shortened. The case where a common variation pattern is configured to be decidable is shown, but it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured so that different fluctuation patterns can be determined even when the time reduction is missed and the relief time is shortened.

(Modification 10)
Further, the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW shows a case where the setting suggestion effect can be executed even after the variation display in which the relief time is established by switching to the background image corresponding to the special effect mode. I can't be limited. For example, based on the look-ahead determination result, the setting suggestion effect can be executed by executing a fanning effect such as "special effect mode ??" in the variation display before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. May be good.

As described above, in the present feature portion 120IW and each modification, the following (means A1) to (means A10), (means B1) to (means B6), (means C1) to (means C5) are shown below. , And the configurations of the inventions shown in (means D1) to (means D5) are shown.

(Means A1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. Numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the special state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. ) Is updatable (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120IWS84), and the special state control means is provided with a special number of times (for example, 900 times) the numerical information updated by the update means. ) Corresponds to a specific value (for example, "0"), and when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a relief time reduction is satisfied), the special state can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is (Step 120 IWS150 is executed), the updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the first special symbol). Regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly), which is different from the specific display result. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is obtained. (Part for executing steps 120IWS114 to S116), special counting means for counting the number of special states generated in the special state (for example, the part for executing steps 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100), and ending the special state. The special state ending means is further provided with a special state ending means (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS143 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state ending means is such that the number of special states counted by the special counting means is a specific number of times (for example,). It is possible to end the special state based on the fact that it has become (once) (for example, a microcomputer for game control). The counter 100 sets the time saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when it is Y in step 120IWS74, determines Y in step 120IWS141 and executes step 120IWS143), and the special state control means is special in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. When the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the special state during the special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a small hit variation. However, if the relief time reduction determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the end of the symbol confirmation period, step 120IWS150 is executed, and in the subsequent small hit game state, the time reduction state C is controlled), the special counting means is In the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result is not counted (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the fluctuation to set the small hit count counter to 1. When the reduction is performed and the relief time is shortened, step 120IWS149 is executed at the end of the fluctuation to set the small hit count counter. Therefore, in the small hit fluctuation in which the relief time is satisfied, after the small hit count counter is set in step 120IWS149, The small hit count counter is not immediately subtracted from the fluctuation display). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately even though the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this example, regarding "controllable to a special state during a special state", if the fluctuation display that becomes the relief time reduction is a small hit fluctuation, the time reduction state C is entered at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and then the time reduction state C is set. Although the case where the time saving state C is controlled even during the small hit game is shown, the timing of shifting to the time saving state C is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the start of the fluctuation of the small hit variation which is the relief time saving, or may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the middle of the small hit game. As such, it suffices if there is a period during which the time saving state C is controlled during the small hit game in some form. In the case of configuring to shift to the time saving state C from the start of the fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation, the subtraction process of the small hit count counter may be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation.

Further, in this example, the case where the "specific number of times" is one is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to end the time saving state based on a plurality of small hits such as two or three times during the time saving state, or a plurality of times may be set as a specific number of times.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the special state ending means has a specified number of times (for example, once) as the number of times of the special state counted by the special counting means, and a predetermined number of times (for example, once) in the special state. When the variable display of 7 times, 99 times, 900 times is executed, and when the special state is terminated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving end flag in step 120IWS74 when it is Y in step 120IWS74). Then, when it is Y in step 120IWS78 and when it is Y in step 120IWS81, the time saving end flag is set in step 120IWS82, and it is determined as Y in step 120IWS141 to execute step 120IWS143). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately even though the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the special state control means can be controlled to the special state based on the control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control micro). The computer 100 executes step 120 IWS537), and the special state termination means is controlled to the special state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition and when it is controlled to the advantageous state. When the number of special states counted by the special counting means becomes the same (for example, once), the special state is terminated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a small hit in step 120IWS149). It may be configured to set "1" to the number of times counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied and the controlled special state from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to an advantageous special state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to the means A3, the special state control means can be controlled to the special state based on the control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the means A4). The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS537), when the special state termination means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the special state is controlled based on the advantageous state. The special state is terminated when the number of times of the special state counted by the special counting means becomes different (for example, twice) from the time when the special counting means is controlled (for example, in the modification example 1, the game control micro is used. The computer 100 may be configured to set the small hit count counter to "2" in step 120IWS149X). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied and the controlled special state from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to an advantageous special state.

It should be noted that the time saving state via the relief time saving may be difficult for the player to immediately notice, but in the modified example 1, the time saving state is terminated with one small hit in the normal time saving state, whereas the time saving state is completed via the relief time saving. Since it is configured to end the time saving state with two small hits only when it is controlled to the time saving state, even if the winning to the second start winning opening is missed by the first small hit (second). (Even if you miss the charge of the hold memory), you can give another chance to win the second start winning opening.

Further, in the modified example 1, in the normal time reduction state, the number of time reductions is often as small as 1 or 7, and the time reduction state ends due to the occurrence of a small hit, whereas the relief time reduction is used. In the time-reduced state, the number of time-reduced times is as high as 900 times, and there are many cases where the time-reduced state is terminated by the occurrence of a small hit. can.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to the means A4, the special state control means counts the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (for example, modification). In Example 2, since the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of the small hit game, in the small hit variation in which the relief time is satisfied, after the small hit count counter is set in step 120IWS149, the variation is displayed. The small hit count counter is immediately subtracted). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, if a special condition is satisfied and a capture element by controlling the special state remains in the special state, the capture element becomes a capture element for the player, and the possibility of becoming a disadvantage of the playground can be reduced.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to the means A5, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the special display result is derived and displayed. It is possible to control the special state after the special state based on the above (for example, in the modification 3, since the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of the small hit game, the small hit variation in which the relief time is shortened is established. It may be configured to be controlled to the time saving state C at the end of the small hit game). According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, when a special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled, it is possible to wait until the start of the control of the special state, so that various controls can be easily performed.

(Means A7) In any one of the means A1 to the means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to the first special state (for example, a time saving state with one time saving number) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a higher advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the first special state after the advantageous state (). For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120 IWS537 and S540). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to the means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to the first special state (for example, a time saving state with one time saving number) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a higher advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the second special state after the advantageous state (). For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120 IWS537 and S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means A9) In any one of the means A1 to the means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to the first special state (for example, the time saving state of 99 times of time saving) after being controlled to the advantageous state in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120 IWS537, S545), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a lower advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the first special state after the advantageous state (). For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542, if it wins a V prize with a small hit variation based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 99 times. It may be configured to be controlled by). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means A10) In any one of means A1 to means A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (for example, a time saving state of 99 times of time saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in a normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and the second special state (for example, time saving) having a lower advantage than the first special state after being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state. It can be controlled to a time saving state of 7 times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and the special display is performed. In the special state based on the derivation and display of the display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area, it is possible to control the second special state after the advantageous state (). For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120 IWS537 and S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that does not become too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the playground).

(Means B1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. Special state control means that can be controlled (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display. ) Can be updated (for example, a portion that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an effect executing means that can execute an effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, step 170 in the effect control CPU 120). (Part for executing S173), and the special state control means is provided with a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) of the numerical information updated by the updating means. When the special condition is satisfied (for example, the relief time is satisfied), the special state can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS 150), and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation of the second special symbol). Regardless of whether the display is executed or not, the value of the relief time reduction count counter is uniformly updated), and the special state control means has a special display result (for example, a time reduction deviation symbol) different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state when it is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), and it is special when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. The state is controlled, and the special display result is the first special display result (for example, the symbol "6" in the time saving loss A) and the second special display result (for example, the symbol "8" in the time saving loss A). There are a plurality of types including, and the special state control means can control the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a game). Control microcomputer The data 100 executes step 120 IWS160 regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed), and the effect executing means is special in the normal state. When the variable display in which the condition is not satisfied is executed, different effects are executed depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, game control). The microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when N in step 120IWS1706 and steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when Y in step 120IWS1706 to determine different fluctuation patterns). When the established variable display is executed, a common effect is executed between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a microcomputer for game control). 100 is characterized in that, even if the time reduction is lost, if the relief time is shortened, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS1702 and steps 120IWS1703 and S1710 are executed to determine a common fluctuation pattern). do. According to such a configuration, it is suitable to control even in a situation where both when the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled and when the special display result is derived and displayed to the special state. Can be done. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when the condition is controlled to a special state by satisfying a special condition.

In this example, as the "same special state", regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed, the time saving is A. Although the case where the time reduction state B is controlled to the same time reduction number of 100 times (see steps 120IWS155 and S160) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the "same special state", (1) control the same number of time reductions, (2) determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol using the same fluctuation pattern table, and (3) use the same fluctuation pattern table. One or more of (4) controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) to the open state by the same opening pattern is executed. It may be configured to execute all of (1) to (4).

Further, in this example, a case where different fluctuation patterns are determined as "performing different effects" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different addition times may be added to the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern depending on whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed and the symbol "8" is derived and displayed. Further, for example, it may be configured to execute either (1) a process of determining a different fluctuation pattern and (2) a process of adding different addition times, or both of them may be executed. You may.

Further, for example, not only the fluctuation time may be different, but also the symbol determination period at the end of the fluctuation may be different.

(Means B2) In the means B1, the effect executing means can execute a common effect in the special state in the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed. (For example, if the game control microcomputer 100 is Y in step 120IWS1704 and Y in step 120IWS1705, it is possible to execute steps 120IWS1709 and S1710 to determine a common fluctuation pattern). good. According to such a configuration, it is suitable to control even in a situation where both when the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled and when the special display result is derived and displayed to the special state. Can be done. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when the condition is controlled to a special state by satisfying a special condition.

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined that the time reduction is off with a probability of about 1/200, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is about 1/400. However, it is not limited to such a mode, and for example, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the time saving probability is further lowered (for example, 1 /). 800), it may be configured so that the time reduction is less likely to occur during the time reduction state.

Further, for example, conversely, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the probability of time reduction loss is increased, and when there is a second hold storage at the end of the time reduction state, the variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction state is performed. It may be configured so that the revival effect can be easily executed.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, a display result determining means (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS93 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a display result is provided, and the display result determining means is controlled in an advantageous state. A common process is executed between the process of determining the type of display result that will be controlled to an advantageous state when the display result is performed and the process of determining the type of special display result when the special display result is obtained (for example). The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 120 IWS93 in common both in the case of determining the jackpot symbol and in the case of determining the time-saving out-of-time symbol). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the program capacity by standardizing the processing.

(Means B4) In any one of the means B1 to the means B3, a variable display control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided and variable. The display control means determines a variable display period, which is a period during which variable display is executed according to the type of display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern), and is a special condition in a normal state. When the variable display in which is satisfied is executed, the variable display period is determined to be different between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when N in step 120IWS1706 and steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when Y in step 120IWS1706 to determine different fluctuation patterns), and variable display is executed in a special state. When the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable display period is determined to be common (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time. Even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened, it may be determined as Y in step 120IWS1702 and steps 120IWS1703, S1710 may be executed to determine a common fluctuation pattern). .. According to such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to the means B4, the effect executing means is a case where the first special display result is derived and displayed when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed in the normal state. The effect different from the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed is executed (for example, in the modification 9, the game control microcomputer 100 is also in the case where the time reduction is out of order and the relief time is shortened. It may be configured so that different fluctuation patterns can be determined). According to such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to the means B5, a variable display control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided and variable. The display control means determines a definite display period of the display result, and the definite display period can be changed according to the type of the display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137. May be configured to perform). According to such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

In this example, the case where the relief time is shortened or the symbol determination period is different depending on the display result is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol determination period may be constant (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether the relief time has been shortened or the display result.

(Means C1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. Special state control means that can be controlled (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display. ) Is updatable (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120IWS84) and a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6" having different ratios of being controlled in an advantageous state). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state control means is a numerical value updated by the update means. When the information becomes a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) and the special condition is satisfied (for example, the relief time reduction is satisfied), the special state can be controlled (for example). , The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS150), and the updating means displays numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is updated (for example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated. ), Notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, relief time saving rush effect) for notifying that the special state is controlled by the special state control means based on the establishment of a special condition. In step 120 IWS808, S845 in step 120, and a suggestion effect executing means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a set value set by the setting means (for example, a setting suggestion effect at the time of relief). Step 120 IWS808, a portion for executing S845), and the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the notification effect is executed (for example,). The effect control CPU 120 can execute steps 120IWS808 and S845 to execute the relief time setting suggestion effect when the relief time shortening rush effect is executed). According to such a configuration, it is suitable to control even in a situation where both when the special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled and when the special display result is derived and displayed to the special state. Can be done. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when the condition is controlled to a special state by satisfying a special condition. In addition, since the ratio at which the special condition is satisfied changes according to the set value, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player when the special condition is controlled by executing the suggestion effect according to the ratio at which the special condition is satisfied. can.

In this example, since the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, the ease of occurrence of the relief time reduction also differs as a result, and the relief time reduction occurs when the setting value is set low. It will be easy to do. Therefore, when the relief time is shortened, the player may feel that the setting value may be low. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by executing the relief time setting suggestion effect that makes it possible to feel that the setting value is high when the relief time is shortened. Therefore, in this example, when the setting values "4" to "6", which are relatively high settings, the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief can be executed, other timings such as the setting suggestion effect at the time of big hit can be executed. The execution ratio is different from the setting suggestion effect executed in.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the setting suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is relieved in the case of a jackpot fluctuation). It may be configured so as not to perform the time saving process). According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed without disturbing other effects.

In this example, the relief time reduction process is not performed for the large hit fluctuation, while the relief time reduction process is performed for the small hit variation. However, not limited to such a mode, the relief time reduction process is performed even for the small hit variation. It may be configured not to perform the processing of.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means C2, the setting suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect even after the special condition is satisfied (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when it is Y in step 120IWS638. ) May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value over a long period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means C4) In any one of the means C1 to the means C3, the setting suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, in the modification 10, the effect control CPU 120 reads ahead. Based on the determination result, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the variation display before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established). With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value over a long period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to the means C4, the setting suggestion effect execution means can execute another suggestion effect (for example, a jackpot setting) that can be executed at a timing different from the suggestion effect when the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889 and step S176), and the suggestion effect when a special condition is satisfied is more advantageous than the other suggestion effects. Suggestion effects that suggest values are easy to execute (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, the relief setting suggestion effects are configured to be feasible when the setting values are set to "4" to "6". Therefore, the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief may be configured to be a setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is relatively high). According to such a configuration, since the rate at which the special condition is satisfied is lower as the setting value is more advantageous, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the special condition is satisfied by executing the suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the jackpot setting suggestion effect is executed during the fanfare period of the jackpot game is not limited to such a mode, but it should be executed during the round period or the ending period of the jackpot game. It may be configured.

(Means D1) Variable display of the identification information including the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and is a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A special state control means that can be controlled (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an initial value set based on the execution of the variable display (for example, for example). The special state control means includes an update means (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of subtracting and updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction count) from “900”). When the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, "0"), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control computer 100 executes step 120 IWS 150), and the update means. Is to subtract and update the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed). Regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is executed or not, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated), and the numerical information to be subtracted and updated by the updating means holds a predetermined condition. Sometimes it is set to an initial value (for example, in the modified examples 5 and 6, the game control computer 100 executes steps 120IWS85B, S84E), and the special state control means is specified by the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means. After controlling from the normal state to the special state based on the value, the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means became a specific value during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set. Based on this, the control from the normal state to the special state is not performed again (for example, in the modified example 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the process of steps 120IWS84 to S86 when the time is Y in the step S120IWS83. In the modified example 6, the game is played. The control computer 100 performs the processing of steps 120IWS84D to S86 when it is Y in step S120IWS84A or when it is N in step 120IWS84C. Do not execute. ). According to such a configuration, when the control to shift to the special state is performed according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update process can be common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value. It is possible to prevent the capacity from increasing and to enable suitable control. For example, if the transition in which the numerical information reaches a specific value does not shift to a special state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity by preparing a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches a specific value.

In addition to the case where the relief time reduction counter is set at the end of the time reduction state via the relief time reduction by executing the steps 120IWS85B and S84E under the predetermined conditions, the step 120IWS13 is set when the initialization process at the time of turning on the power is executed. This includes the case where the relief time reduction counter is set by being executed, and the case where step 120IWS135 is executed and the relief time reduction counter is set when a big hit occurs.

When the relief time reduction counter is set when a big hit occurs, it may be set at the start of the big hit game, or may be set during the round of the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game.

Further, when the relief time reduction counter is set at the time of executing the initialization process at the time of turning on the power, the process may be different depending on whether the setting is changed or not. For example, if the initialization process is executed after changing the settings, the relief time reduction counter is set, while if the initialization process is executed without changing the settings, the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set. It may be configured to be maintained. On the contrary, when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, the value of the current relief time reduction counter is maintained, while when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting, the relief time is shortened. It may be configured to set the number of times counter.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the updating means performs variable display when the subtraction-updated numerical information is a value larger than a specific value and when the subtraction-updated numerical information is a specific value. Is executed, the numerical information can be subtracted and updated (for example, in the modification 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS84), and the subtracted and updated numerical information is larger than the specific value. When it is a value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when N in step 120IWS84A), and the subtracted and updated numerical information is used. When the value is smaller than the specific value, the numerical information may be updated to the specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may execute step 120IWS84B at Y in step 120IWS84A). .. According to such a configuration, when the control to shift to the special state is performed according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update process can be common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value. It is possible to prevent the capacity from increasing and to enable suitable control. For example, if the transition in which the numerical information reaches a specific value does not shift to a special state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity by preparing a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches a specific value.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or the means D2, an operating means (for example, a clear switch) for performing an operation and an initial value setting means (for example) for setting numerical information updated by the updating means according to the operation of the operating means as initial values. , A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120 IWS13). According to such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set the initial value by operating the operating means, so that the convenience in terms of operation can be enhanced.

As an operating means for changing the setting or setting the relief time reduction counter, a dedicated operating means (button or switch) different from the clear switch may be provided.

(Means D4) In any one of the means D1 to the means D3, the special state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving missed symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed. Yes (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120 IWS 160), and even when the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means is a specific value, it can be controlled to a special state when the special display result is displayed. Therefore, even after the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes a specific value, it is possible to control the special state when the special display result is displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. Step 120 IWS88 may be executed regardless of whether or not the time saving state C via the relief time saving is in progress). According to such a configuration, since the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated may be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means D5) In any one of the means D1 to the means D4, a determination means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a determination means. Pre-reading notice effect based on the determination means for determining whether or not the control is in an advantageous state (for example, the portion for executing step 120IWS101 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the determination result of the determination means. (For example, the part that executes step S161 in the effect control CPU 120), a predetermined period before the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes a specific value, and the updating means subtracting and updating. In the specific period after the numerical information is set to a specific value, the look-ahead notice effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the look-ahead notice effect (for example, in the modification 7, as shown in FIGS. 8-45, the time saving state C is set. Execution of the look-ahead notice effect over a predetermined period from the end 8 fluctuation display before the change to the relief time reduction and a specific period from the relief time reduction to the 8 change change display after the end of the time reduction state C. (Restrict), and may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, since the numerical information that has been subtracted and updated may be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is uniformly 900 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode and varies depending on, for example, a set value. The relief time may be shortened based on the fact that the variable display is executed for the number of times. For example, when the set values are "1" to "5", the relief time is shortened while the relief time is shortened based on the fact that the variation display is executed 900 times without the big hit, the small hit, and the time reduction. When the value is "6", it may be configured so that the relief time reduction occurs based on the execution of the fluctuation display 600 times without the big hit, the small hit, and the time reduction deviation, and a specific setting. Only in the case of a value, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be different.

Further, for example, for all of the set values "1" to "6", the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be different for each set value. In this case, for example, the ratio of the denominator of the jackpot probability to the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be configured to be the same as about 3 times. Further, for example, within the range of 2.5P ≦ n ≦ 3.0P (P = denominator of jackpot probability, n = number of fluctuations until the relief time is controlled), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is made different. May be.

Further, even in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving state may not always be continued until the next big hit occurs. In this case, as shown in the above-mentioned feature unit 120IW, the small hit occurs. It may be configured to end the time saving state, and as shown in the modified example 5 and the modified example 6, the time saving state is terminated based on the completion of the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (900 times in this example). It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in the modified example 5 and the modified example 6, after the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (900 times in this example) is finished in the time shortened state via the relief time saving and the normal state is entered, the big hit or the small hit is further performed. , If the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (for example, 900 times) is completed without losing the time reduction, the relief time may be shortened again and the state may be changed to the time reduction state, or the relief time may not be reduced again. It may be configured. In this case, when the relief time is not shortened again, for example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0, it may be controlled not to perform the subtraction processing of the relief time reduction counter from the next processing. Then, the process of subtracting the relief time reduction counter from the next process and returning it to 0 when it becomes a negative value may be performed.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 10A) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, step 120 IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). A portion for executing S160 and S537) and an update means (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display are provided. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, step 120IWS85 in the game control microcomputer 100). , The part that executes S86. The part that executes step 120 IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), The updating means is executed when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It may be configured to update the numerical information depending on the case (for example, the part where the step 120 IWS 84 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is variablely displayed, the numerical information is continuously updated, which makes it easier for the player to be rescued and motivates the game. Can be done.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display (means 2A). For example, a portion for executing steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a portion for executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, since the display result that is disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and displayed, it is relieved, so that the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A or the means 2A, the updating means updates the numerical information (for example, when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a time saving state, which may be a probabilistic state)). , The part that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to the special state once, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to means 3A, the updating means sets numerical information as an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, steps 120 IWS13, S135, S149, in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be configured to execute S161). According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to an advantageous state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 5A) In the means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS 135 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to an advantageous state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 6A) In the means 4A, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, game control). (Part of executing step 120 IWS 160 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), a predetermined condition is configured to derive and display a special display result (for example, a portion of executing step 120 IWS 161 in the microcomputer 100 for game control). You may. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7A) In the means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured such that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, a portion for executing step 120 IWS 149 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 8A) The means 4A includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information to be updated by the updating means even when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means is provided. , Set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of the initialization process) (for example, the part where step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). , The predetermined condition may be configured such that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a portion for executing steps S8 and 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to a special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. Can be made easier.

(Means 9A) In any one of the means 1A to the means 8A, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means has a special number of times. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more (for example, the part where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the special state is special. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times (for example, the portion where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the effect control means is It may be configured to execute different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By making changes to the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 10A) In any one of the means 1A to the means 8A, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means has a special number of times. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more (for example, the part where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the special state is special. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times (for example, the portion where steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the effect control means is It may be configured to execute a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to the special state in the second specific period, it is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification, the configurations shown in the following (means 1B-1), (means 1B-2) to (means 5B) may be applied.

(Means 1B-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming area that is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can divide a game medium into a first path (for example, a path by left-handed hitting) and a second path (for example, a path by right-handed hitting). A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a portion that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display. A plurality of types including an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control. A process execution means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required for executing a process and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a game control micro). The part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the computer 100. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display is executed (for example, the portion where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the processing execution means is the first regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value. One process is executed (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control computer 100), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second process regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example). , The part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (For example, a game control microcomputer) The data 100 may be configured to execute the next variable postponement process), the game medium is launched to the first path in the normal state, and the game is played in the special state, and the game medium is sent to the second path in the special state. It may be configured to include a launch promotion notification means for firing and performing a game and executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1B-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A step in a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. Variable with 120IWS150, S160, S537 (execution part) and update means (for example, part for executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) in which numerical information can be updated based on execution of variable display. A process execution means (for example,) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including display control and advantageous state control, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step S25), and the state control means is provided when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control computer 100; a part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control computer 100), and the updating means is the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the processing execution means is , The first process related to the variable display is executed when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control computer 100), and the data value is different from the first numerical value. At this time, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, the portion where steps S114 to S117 are executed in the game control computer 100), and the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The state control means executes a third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute the next variation postponement process). Information that informs that the special state is controlled during the execution of the third process. It may be configured to include an effect executing means for executing an intellectual effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B-1 and the means 1B-2, the process executing means executes the second process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B-1, means 1B-2 or means 2B, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, performs step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part), the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value, and the special information when the state control means controls the special state. May be changed from the second information to the first information, and may be configured to execute different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 4B) The means 3B includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern for variable display, and the variable display pattern determining means is special. It may be configured to determine different variable display patterns when the information is the first information and when the information is the second information. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 5B) The means 3B includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern for variable display, and the variable display pattern determining means is special. It may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs depending on whether the information is the first information or the second information. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 6C) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the game, and an effect corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a effect control means for controlling (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A controllable state control means (for example, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537) and an update means for updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example,). , The portion that executes step 120 IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means that controls the state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is variable. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the display (for example, the part where step 120IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100) and updated. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a portion for executing steps 120 IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100). The portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 120 IWS150.), The updating means is numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state, and the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result. When the state information is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derivation display, the state information is set as the second numerical value, and when the state information is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. Is different from the first and second numbers As a numerical value, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when it is in a special state, the specific information according to the case where the state information is the second numerical value and the case where the state information is the third numerical value. May be configured to be capable of transmitting. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be suitably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the state information control means obtains the state information as the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value when the special condition is satisfied again after being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be suitably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, the effect control means controls the special state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured so that different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently digest the variable display in the special state where the special condition is satisfied and controlled, so that it is possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4C) In any of the means 1C to the means 3C, the effect control means controls the special state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means is special. It may be configured so that a common effect can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed) when the special state is controlled based on the condition being satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because no new production is required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to the means 4C, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, the part where step 120IWS160 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means controls the state when the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result. The control means may be configured so that different effects can be executed when the control means is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently digest the variable display in the special state where the special condition is satisfied and controlled, so that it is possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to the means 4C, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means , When the state control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. It may be configured so that the effect of can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because no new production is required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 4D) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the game, and an effect corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a effect control means for controlling (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A state control means that can be controlled (for example, a portion that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example,). , A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 120 IWS84), and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. Including, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100). The part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control computer 100), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether it is executed (for example, a portion where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the game control means transmits predetermined information to the effect control means when the power supply is started. It is possible, and even if the effect control means is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the power supply is started based on the reception of the predetermined information. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, the game control means is configured to be able to transmit specific information that can specify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the effect control means is based on the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on specific information, and as specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is less than or equal to a predetermined value. It includes the first specific information (for example, a command for specifying the number of times of relief time reduction 1) and the second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, the number of times of relief time reduction). The command may be configured to specify the number of times 2). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to means 3D, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that, and every time a second predetermined number of variable displays less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the special number of variable displays is executed, the suggestion effect can be executed. It may be configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

Further, the configurations shown in the following (means 1E-1) and (means 1E-2) may be applied to the above-mentioned feature portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It corresponds to a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a game and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state). The game control means includes a production control means for controlling the effect (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A state control means that can be controlled by the state) (for example, a part that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display. (For example, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 120 IWS84) and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. , A step in the initialization means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times that the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (the part for executing S8). For example, a part for executing steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control computer 100; a part for executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100), when the updating means is executed for variable display of the first identification information. And when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the effect control means has the stored contents of the backup storage means. Specified when the specific display result is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after initialization, and after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized. The display result is derived and displayed. After that, it may be configured to execute different effects when it is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition and when it is controlled to the special state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It corresponds to a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a game and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state). The game control means includes a production control means for controlling the effect (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A state control means that can be controlled by the state) (for example, a part that executes steps 120 IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control computer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display. (For example, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 120 IWS84) and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. , A step in the initialization means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times that the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (the part for executing S8). For example, a part for executing steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control computer 100; a part for executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100), when the updating means is executed for variable display of the first identification information. And when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part where step 120IWS84 is executed in the game control computer 100), and the effect control means has the stored contents of the backup storage means. Specified when the specific display result is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after initialization, and after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized. The display result is derived and displayed. After that, it may be configured to execute different effects when it is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition and after it is controlled to the special state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Explanation of feature section 090IW)
Next, the feature unit 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 090IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time saving state via the small hit game state based on the derivation and display of the small hit symbol. Further, the display result of the small hit includes the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B which can be controlled in the time saving state, and the display result of the small hit C which cannot be controlled in the time saving state. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result which becomes a small hit is derived and displayed, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result which becomes a small hit is derived and displayed. The ratio of the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is different.

(Big hit type judgment table, small hit type judgment table)
9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 9-1 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of big hit to "10R time saving big hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of big hit to "10R time saving big hit".

The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. After shifting to the reduced working hours state, the reduced working hours state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the 10R time saving big hit is determined with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the 10R time saving big hit is determined with a 100% probability.

The jackpot type is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, even if the number of time reductions is different (for example, 3 or 5 times) and a plurality of types of time reduction jackpots are provided, or the number of rounds is different (for example, 2 rounds or 4 rounds) and a plurality of types of time reduction jackpots are provided. good. Further, in this example, only the case where only the time-saving jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided, but the non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided. It may be configured. Further, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the case where the 100R time saving jackpot is determined with a 100% probability is shown, but the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Even in this case, it may be configured to be determined by a plurality of types of jackpots.

FIG. 9-1 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), the small hit type determination table is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type as either "small hit A", "small hit B", or "small hit C".

"Small hit A" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and does not pass through the V winning opening). It is a small hit that shifts to a time-saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that it is detected. When shifting to the reduced working hours state, the reduced working hours state is maintained until the 10-time variation display is completed. The "small hit A" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second round to the fourth round on condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when it becomes "small hit A", the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as not to win V.

"Small hit B" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and does not pass through the V winning opening). It is a small hit that shifts to a time-saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that it is detected. When shifting to the reduced working hours state, the reduced working hours state is maintained until the five fluctuation displays are completed. The "small hit B" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second round to the fourth round on condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the "small hit B" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as not to win the V prize.

"Small hit C" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win V (detected by the non-V winning opening switch and did not pass through the V winning opening). Even if it is detected that there is a small hit), it is a small hit that does not shift to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed. Further, the "small hit C" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second round to the fourth round on condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, when the "small hit C" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as to win a V in most cases.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), in this example, 25% of the cases where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained is determined as "small hit A", and 25% is determined. It is determined to be "small hit B" and 50% is determined to be "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (D), in this example, 5% of the cases where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained is determined as "small hit A", and 5% is It is determined to be "small hit B" and 90% is determined to be "small hit C".

The small hit type is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of types of time saving jackpots may be provided with different number of time saving times (for example, 3 times or 5 times). Further, it may be configured to provide a small hit without V winning, which is substantially impossible to win a V during the small hit game and does not shift to the big hit game after the small hit game.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a small hit is higher than the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, so that the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a higher rate of becoming a small hit A or a small hit B (that is, a small hit with a time reduction), but when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the small hit with a time reduction is 100%. You may hit it.

(Opening pattern of small hit game)
Next, the opening pattern of the small hit game will be described. FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 9-2, when the small hit game is started at the timing S1 and the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at the timing S2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the closed state, a special variable of 0.05 seconds is performed. After opening the winning ball device (special winning opening), after a closing time of 1 second, the special winning opening is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning opening is similarly opened twice. Performs opening and closing operations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the case of small hit C (no time reduction), the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) is controlled when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state. By repeating the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds and then closing the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds again so that is controlled to the open state, one small The special winning opening is opened 10 times by hitting.

The operation of the V winning opening opening / closing plate is common to the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) and the case of small hit C (without time reduction), and in either case, it is opened for 8 seconds.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning opening in a small hit is as short as 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, a plurality of restricted pieces are formed in the special variable winning ball device. On the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, about 2 to 3 game balls meander and flow down, so if the bottom member is controlled to be open even if the opening time is short, it will be on the bottom member. The game ball can fall into the special variable winning ball device and enter.

Then, in the case of small hit C (no time reduction), the special variable winning ball device is opened when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is open, so that the game ball can be won in the V winning opening. It is possible. In the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), the special variable winning ball device is opened when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is closed, so that the game ball is won in the V winning opening. Impossible or difficult to make.

When the small hit C (no time reduction), the game ball that has entered the special winning opening is not controlled to the time saving state when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening, but the small hit A or B (with time reduction). In this case, the game ball that has entered the special winning opening is controlled to a time saving state when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening. As a result, when the small hit C (no time reduction), the game ball is likely to pass through the V winning opening and be controlled to the big hit state, but is not controlled to the small hit state, and the small hit A or B is not controlled. In the case of (with time reduction), it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will be controlled in the jackpot state without passing through the V winning opening, but it is highly likely that it will be controlled in the time reduction state.

Then, if the game ball wins in the special winning opening and V wins, after the closing time (interval time) and the small hit end time (ending time) of a predetermined period have elapsed after the final opening of the special winning opening is completed. , The game shifts to the big hit game state, and the control to the open state of the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (without time reduction), the ending period shifts from timing S3 to S4, but small hit A or B (with time reduction). ), The ending period t3 is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of small hit C (no time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. As a result, in the case of a small hit A or B (with a time reduction), it is possible to secure a time for displaying the start screen (see FIG. 9-9 (N)) in the time reduction state.

In the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening (that is, whether or not to shift to the time reduction state). Specifically, when the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, the time is controlled to be shortened. In this case, the ending period is lengthened.

As described above, in this example, different patterns are used when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed (open in this example). The special variable winning ball device can be controlled to the open state by the number of times). Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the time saving state is controlled.

Specifically, in this example, the V prize that performs a common operation when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. When the opening / closing plate is provided and the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, it is special when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is in a state of obstructing the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening. When the variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state and the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is in a state of not obstructing the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the time saving state is controlled.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 090IW. Of these, FIG. 9-3 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 9-4 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. As shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is used as the variation pattern. Fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development effect), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 ( It is determined to be one of a variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development effect), a variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and a variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). In addition, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a deviation during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns are the fluctuation pattern PA1-5 (shortened fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-6 (non-shortened fluctuation). Reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β) Will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach) is used as the variation pattern. , The fluctuation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 (super reach β) is determined. Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of the patterns PB1-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of PC1-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), and fluctuation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β). Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the small hit C is obtained during the time saving state, the variation patterns are the variation pattern PC1-1 (normal reach) and the variation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α). , Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC1-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, when the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. It is decided to be one of the fluctuation pattern PC1-4 (non-reach → development production with normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PC1-5 (non-reach → development production with shortened fluctuation), and the fluctuation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development production). Will be done. In addition, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the variation pattern PC1-6 (non-reach in shortened variation →) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be either development effect) or variable pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the variation occurs during the normal state, the variation patterns are the variation pattern PA3-1 and the variation pattern PA3-. It is decided to be one of 2 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development production). In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the variation occurs during the time saving state, the variation patterns include the variation pattern PA3-3 (shortened variation) and the variation pattern PA3-4 (non-shortened variation). Reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α,) fluctuation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β) Will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-5 (normal reach) is determined as the variation pattern. .. In addition, when executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of the patterns PC3-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the small hits A to C occur during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach) is used as the variation pattern. Will be decided. If the small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β). It will be decided by either.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. It is determined to be either a variation pattern PD3-4 (non-reach → development effect in shortened variation) or a variation pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development effect).

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, it is decided that the normal state has a 10% probability of hitting the normal figure, and the time saving state has a 90% probability. It is decided that it will be a hit with a probability. Further, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) in the open state based on the determination that the normal symbol hit is achieved in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

As described above, in this example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The rate at which development effects are executed is different. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the effect is pasted and the effect is executed, but in the case of small hit C, the development effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading notice effect and the effect after the big hit game state or the time-saving state, so that the pre-reading notice effect can be suitably executed.

In the case of a small hit A or a small hit B (with a time reduction), a variation pattern common to the small hit C (no time reduction), the missed time, and the big hit may be provided.

(Post-processing after closing the small hit)
FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 090IW. In the small hit closing post-processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS453. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer the time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 090IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter if it is set (step 090IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big winning opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed that the V winning flag is not set in the process of step 090IWS456, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a small hit A (step 090IWS461). In the case of small hit A, it is confirmed whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS462). “10” is set in the time reduction counter (step 090IWS463). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation A command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not a small hit A (N in step 090IWS461), it confirms whether or not it is a small hit B (step 090IWS467). In the case of small hit B, it is confirmed whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS468). “5” is set in the time reduction counter (step 090IWS469). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation B command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when it is confirmed that the CPU 103 is not the small hit B (N in step 090IWS467), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation C command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 090IWS465). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

A value is set in the timer that measures the ending period after the small hit is closed depending on whether it is the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction) or small hit C (without time reduction). Alternatively, the value is set so that the ending period in the case of B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-6 and 9-7 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7 in the feature unit 090IW. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The jackpot stop flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has already been derived and displayed but before the jackpot start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS875 described later. If the jackpot stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small hit stop flag is a flag indicating that the small hit symbol has already been derived and displayed but before the small hit start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS883 described later. If the small hit stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbols (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) (step 090IWS873).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 090IWS878). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 090IWS879), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 090IWS880).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step 090IWS881).

Unless the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). .. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y of step 090IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 090IWS885). It should be noted that whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small hit start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with a time reduction) (step 090IWS887a). In the case of a small hit A or a small hit B, the process table of the small hit notification effect for notifying that the hit is a small hit and the right-handed instruction A for instructing a right-handed hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). If it is not a small hit A or a small hit B, that is, if it is a small hit C (no time reduction), a V winning promotion effect for promoting the winning of a game ball to the V winning opening and a right-handing instruction B for instructing a right-handed hit Select the process data of (step 090IWS887b). It should be noted that the right-handed instruction A and the right-handed instruction B are different in mode. Further, the right-handed instruction is different from the right-handed instruction C in the time-saving state. For example, as a difference in mode, the size, position, and content of the right-handed image are different.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 090IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (step 090IWS889). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period during the small hit game (step 090IWS890).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 090IWS891).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state during the small hit game, in the small hit medium effect processing, the effect corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is performed as the small hit medium effect. Will be executed.

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step 090IWS882), that is, when it is determined that the hit is off, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated according to the display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect of the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) and the small hit C (without time reduction) will be described.

FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10 show the transition of the screen when the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) is reached in the normal state (low probability / low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), when controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left. The small symbol 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting prize is almost generated in the first starting winning opening in the normal state, an example is shown in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. .. Then, in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the small symbol 090IW100, the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right, which is larger than the small symbol 090IW100, starts to fluctuate in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and 9-8 (C), it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the jackpot symbol reaches normal reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 inside is stopped and the out-of-order symbol is stopped. At this time, the decorative symbol 090IW101 is not in a completely stopped state, but in a temporary stop state accompanied by shaking. The small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is temporarily erased, and the development effect is executed. In this example, the character 090IW102, which suggests that the time saving state is controlled, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100. The small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (F), after the development effect shown in FIG. 9-8 (E) is executed, the decorative symbol 090IW101 that has been temporarily stopped is displayed in a variable manner again. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (G) and 9-8, it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the small hit A or the small hit B is in the reach state. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), it is assumed that the remaining decorative symbol 090IW101 is stopped and the small hit symbol "135" of the small hit A or the small hit B is stopped. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 also stops at "135" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (J), when the small hit symbol "135" is stopped in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small hit is generated in the time before opening before the special variable winning ball device is opened. The character 090IW103 suggesting that it should start is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (K), when the small hit game is started, the background A during the small hit is displayed, and the character "small hit" is displayed to notify that the small hit game is in progress. 090IW105 is displayed. Further, in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B, it is difficult to win the game ball in the V winning opening, and it is difficult to generate the big hit. For this reason, it is more disappointing for the player than the small hit C, which tends to generate a big hit, but in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B, V is not won and the time is controlled to be shortened. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter toward the special variable winning ball device, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the right-handed instruction is given so as not to agitate the player unnecessarily. Display (Right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the lower right of the screen. The right-handed instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the characters "right-handed" and one arrow pointing to the right. In order to make the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 inconspicuous, the small hit medium background A is a flashy background that attracts the interest of the player, such as the appearance of a character.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (L), when the small hit game state ends without winning the V winning opening, the end screen is displayed in the ending period of the small hit. For example, the background and characters corresponding to the end screen are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (M), after the end screen of the small hit game is displayed, the start screen in the time saving state is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time saving state is started and the number of fluctuations in the time saving state are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time saving state is completed, the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left middle right is started, and the control of the time saving state is started. When the control of the time reduction state is started, the background during the time reduction is displayed, and the remaining number of fluctuations 090IW107 in the time reduction state is displayed in the upper right of the screen. Further, during the time saving state, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the upper part of the screen in order to allow the game ball to enter toward the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time-saving state is composed of the character "right-handed" and two right-pointing arrows. The right-handed instruction display 090IW108 is larger than the right-handed instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (O) and 9-10 (P) (Q), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 is stopped, the small symbol 090IW100 is stopped, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (R), when the next fluctuation is started and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol 090IW101 and the small symbol 090IW100 is started, the remaining number of fluctuations 090IW107 is subtracted. After that, the same control is performed until the time saving state ends.

FIGS. 9-11 to 9-12 show the transition of the screen when the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), when the image display device 5 is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left. The small symbol 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting prize is almost generated in the first starting winning opening in the normal state, an example is shown in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. .. Then, in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the small symbol 090IW100, the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right, which is larger than the small symbol 090IW100, starts to fluctuate in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (B), (C), and (D), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right stops, and the small hit symbol "357" of the small hit C stops. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 also stops at "357" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (E), when the small hit symbol "357" is stopped in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small hit is generated in the time before opening before the special variable winning ball device is opened. The character 090IW103 suggesting that it should start is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (F), when the small hit game is started, the background B during the small hit is displayed, and the game ball is launched aiming at the V winning opening of the special variable winning ball device. The character 090IW109 "Aim for V!" Is displayed to notify that. Further, in the case of the small hit C, it is easy for the game ball to win the V winning opening, and it is easy to generate a big hit. For this reason, the player is pleased to be able to obtain a large amount of balls. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter toward the special variable winning ball device and generate a big hit, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is greatly conspicuous in the center of the screen. Display with. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the characters "right-handed" and three right-pointing arrows. In addition, in order to make the right-handed instruction display 090IW107 more conspicuous, the small hit medium background B has a simple screen without characters or the like appearing, and is a sober background that does not attract the interest of the player. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is larger than the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 in the small hit A or the small hit B and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time saving, and the display positions are also different.

As described above, the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 in the small hit A or the small hit B, the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 in the small hit C, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time saving are the sizes, display positions, and display modes ( The number of arrows) is different.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (G), when the V winning opening is won and the small hit game state ends, it is suggested that a winning is generated at the V winning opening and a big hit is generated during the ending period of the small hit. The letter "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (H), the character 090IW111 "ROUND2" suggesting that the big hit game (second round) is started is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (I), when the big hit game (second round) is started, the background during the big hit is displayed, and the game is performed in the big hit game state. The same applies to the third and fourth rounds. In this example, an example in which a small hit C is obtained during the normal state is described, but even if a small hit C is obtained during the reduced working hours state, the same effect as described above is performed during the small hit game, and the small hit is performed. A larger right-handed instruction is displayed than in the case of hit A or small hit B. Further, different effects may be executed depending on whether the small hit C is obtained during the normal state and the small hit C is performed during the time saving state, and the size of the right-handed instruction display may be different.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball device is in the open state depending on whether the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The effect performed when controlled by is different. Specifically, in the case of a small hit A or a small hit B, the character 090IW105 indicating that the small hit game is in progress is displayed while the character 090IW105 is displayed (FIG. 9-9 (FIG. 9-9). K)), the character 090IW109 "Aim for V!" Is displayed to notify that the game ball is launched aiming at the V winning opening of the special variable winning ball device (FIG. 9-11 (F)). Therefore, when the display result that is a small hit is derived and displayed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that the game ball passing through a right-handed path through which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area can enter. Then, the launch promotion display regarding the promotion of the launch of the game ball to the right-handed path is performed, and the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The launch promotion display is designed to be displayed in a different manner from time to time. Specifically, unlike the small hits A and B, the small hit C tends to generate a large hit. Therefore, when the small hit A or B is used, the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 (FIG. 9-9 (K)). (See) is displayed, and when the small hit is C, the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 9-11 (F)) is displayed. Therefore, the game can be suitably advanced.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), it is possible to execute an effect suggesting that the time is controlled as a notice effect of becoming a small hit. That is, the character 090IW102 of "time reduction?" Is displayed, which suggests that the development effect is executed and controlled to the time reduction state. Therefore, since the variation of the look-ahead notice effect increases, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example)
Next, a modified example of the effect executed in the feature unit 090IW will be described. Hereinafter, in the modified example, in FIG. 9-2, a special variable winning prize is obtained when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. By making the opening pattern of the ball device different, the ease of winning the game ball to the V winning opening is made different, and an example of controlling whether or not to control the time saving state is given, but in the modified example, a small hit is given. The special variable winning ball device is opened according to the same pattern when the display result of A or small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, but the special variable winning ball is opened. By making the time before opening of the device different, the ease of winning the game ball to the V winning opening is made different, and it is controlled whether or not the time is controlled to be shortened. The description of the parts common to FIG. 9-2 will be omitted.

FIG. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. The operation of the V winning opening opening / closing plate is common to the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) and the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), after the small hit game is started at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses, at timing S2. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to the closed state. Then, after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds, after a closing time of 1 second, the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds is repeated, so that the special winning opening is opened 10 times with one small hit. Be released.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), in the case of the small hit C (no time reduction), after the small hit game is started at the timing S1, the pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 is set. After that, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at the timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning opening opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state. Then, according to the same pattern as in FIG. 9-13 (A), the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds is repeated after the closing time of 1 second after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds. One small hit opens the special winning opening 10 times.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball has the same pattern when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The device can be controlled to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent in advance from being detected in advance which small hit display result will be derived and displayed.

Further, in this example, the V winning opening opening / closing plate that performs a common operation when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to be open depending on whether the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The period until is different. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the time saving state is controlled.

(Other modified examples)
In this feature unit 090IW, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of small hits in which a game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening. Then, as multiple types of small hits, a small hit that shifts to a shorter time state when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, and a small hit that wins in the special winning opening but is played in the V winning opening. A small hit that does not shift to the time saving state when the ball does not win is provided. Then, a small hit that shifts to a shorter time state when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, and when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening. It is possible to configure it to perform a different effect depending on the small hit that does not shift to the time saving state. In the effect, either one of the variable state and the small hit game state may be different, or both may be different.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modifications, the mode of transitioning to the time saving state (high base state) always goes through the big hit state and the small hit state, but the present invention illustrates the mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state (high base state) may be entered without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ..

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as a part of the out-of-time symbol or as a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, a lottery may be executed using a dedicated random number for time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed by using other random numbers such as a lottery random number, a small hit symbol lottery random number, a big hit lottery determination random number, and a fall lottery lottery random number.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols, which are out-of-order symbols.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, the winning value is the specific missing symbol random number when the missing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, and the jackpot symbol random number is specified when the big hit symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. The big hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time reductions given may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the derivation lottery for the time-reduced end symbol (time-reduced end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-reduced times may be set to the number of times until the time-reduced end symbol is derived and displayed after the time-reduced start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called a specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In this example, it is possible to control the symbol to a time-saving state (so-called ceiling) when the number of times the symbol changes in the normal state reaches a predetermined number of times. Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of fluctuations until the time is reduced, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the setting is changed, etc.) or when the jackpot is completed. do. Then, when the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is controlled. In the counting method, the value set in the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation to determine whether or not the count value has reached 0, thereby determining whether or not the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times. Alternatively, the value of the counter may be added each time the fluctuation occurs, and it may be determined whether or not the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times. In addition, the predetermined number of times until the time reduction state is controlled may be determined by lottery. As a result, it is not possible to know the timing at which the time is controlled to be shortened, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The predetermined number of times n, which is the number of fluctuations of the symbol until it is controlled to the time saving state, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, P = 319 when the jackpot probability is 1/319). It is possible to set 2.5P ≦ n ≦ 3.0P. Further, the predetermined number of times N, which is the number of fluctuations of the symbol until it is controlled to the time saving state, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, P = 319 when the jackpot probability is 1/319). It is possible to set 0.4P ≦ N ≦ 3.8P. Note that these are examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

Further, the RAM initialization (when the clear switch is operated, the setting is changed, etc.) and the setting of the predetermined number of times P at the time of a big hit may be inherited from the number of times before the initialization. In this case, it can be expected that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times P shortly after the start of the game and is controlled in a time-saving state, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine can be increased.
On the other hand, when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the setting is changed, etc.) or when the predetermined number of times P is set at the time of a big hit, the number of times before the initialization may not be inherited. In this case, any player can be allowed to play the game under fair conditions.

Further, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times and the time reduction state is controlled, the time reduction state may be terminated when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number, or the time reduction state may be continued until the next big hit. good.

When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again. In this configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times in the time saving state is set and the upper limit number of times is made larger than the predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled, the count value reaches the predetermined number of times during the time saving state. Since the upper limit number of times is set again, it is possible to continue the time saving state until the next big hit while setting the upper limit number of times.

It is also possible not to count the number of fluctuations during the time saving state. In this case, when the upper limit number of times of the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times.

In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the time saving state when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the first number, and when the lottery is not won, the time is shortened when the number of fluctuations reaches the second number. It may be controlled to the state (so-called pattern of reaching the ceiling via the temporary ceiling).

If the feature unit IW090 is provided with a ceiling and is configured to control the time reduction state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, either small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) can be obtained. The value of the counter does not reset and continues counting. When the small hit is C (no time reduction), when the big hit does not occur, the value of the counter is not reset and the counting is continued. As a result, in the case of a small hit A or a small hit B (with a time reduction), the count value may reach a predetermined number of times during the time reduction after the end of the small hit game, and the time reduction state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the development after the small hit game is completed. In addition, even if the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs and the big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time reduction state immediately after the small hit game ends, so expectation for the development after the small hit game ends. Can have.

As described above, the feature unit 090IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1) to (means 8).

(Means 1)
A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol).
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state.
It has a special area (for example, V winning opening) and is controlled into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device),
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion in which step S76 is executed in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, for game control. (Part of executing step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display result is a first special display result (for example, a display result of small hit A or small hit B) and a second special display result different from the first special display result (for example, small hit C). Display result), including
The state control means is
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B) is derived and displayed, the special state is entered. Controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 at Y at step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS468 at Y at step 090IWS467a).
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small hit C) is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled (for example). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when the time is N in step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100, the processes of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 are not executed).
The ease of passing through the special area of the game medium differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, in FIG. 9-2). Shown part),
The effect executing means produces different effects when the variable means is in the first state depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is feasible (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b, 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 9-9 (K) and 9-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, an example of shifting to a time-saving state after the end of the small hit game is given on the condition that the special winning opening is won but the V is not won, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the case of a small hit, the time may be shortened after the small hit game is completed on the condition that the game ball does not win in the special winning opening.

(Means 2) In means 1,
The ratio of the specific effect being executed in the effect during variable display differs between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 9-). 3. As shown in FIG. 9-4, the development effect is performed at the time of the small hit A or the small hit B, and is not performed at the time of the small hit C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading notice effect and the effect after the advantageous state or the special state, so that the pre-reading notice effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2.
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined route (for example, a right-handed route) can enter.
Launch promotion display means for displaying launch promotion display (for example, right-handed instruction display) relating to promotion of launch of a game medium to the predetermined route For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7, steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the effect control CPU 120 are executed. With the part to do)
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different modes depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 9). As shown in −7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 9-9 (K) and 9-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be suitably advanced.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device is opened so as not to win the V when the small hit A or the small hit B is shifted to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that the V prize is not won. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a small hit may be provided to shift to a shorter time state after the small hit game is completed on condition that the V prize is not won, and to open the special variable winning ball device so that the V prize can be easily won.

(Means 4) In any of means 1 to means 3,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state by different patterns depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example,). The part shown in FIG. 9-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 5) In any of means 1 to means 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state by the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state, and it is possible to prevent in advance from being detected which special display result is derived and displayed.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to means 5,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. )
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area.
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of not obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area (. For example, the part shown in FIG. 9-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 7) In any of means 1 to means 6,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. )
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. Part shown in 9-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 8) In any of means 1 to means 7,
A plurality of types of the special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area are provided.
The plurality of types of the special display result are the special display result controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and the special display result when the game medium does not pass through the special area. Including the special display result, which is not controlled by the state,
Controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area Controlled to the special state when the special display result is derived and displayed and when the game medium does not pass through the special area. When the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed, a different effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Explanation of feature 113IW)
Next, the feature portion 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 113IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state (also controlled by the time saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will get a "hit" in a normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10%, while in the short time state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90%, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be used by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased as compared with the normal state and the time saving state. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on what has been done.

Further, in this example, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the big hit occurs, the next big hit Even if this does not occur, it may be controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving). This relief time reduction is provided to rescue a player who has played a game for a long period of time but has not generated a big hit (for example, to suppress investment in the game). , It is a game state called "play time".

Hereinafter, the time saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a big hit is "time saving state A" or "time saving state via a big hit", and the time saving state controlled based on the stop of the time saving symbol is "time saving state". "B" or "time saving state via time saving loss", in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a big hit occurs, a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) The time saving state controlled when the next big hit does not occur even after the fluctuation display is finished may be referred to as "time saving state C" or "time saving state via relief time saving".

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of (1) to (4) may be controlled differs between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a non-time saving state (normal state) is set to 100% (no deviation of the normal figure), or the probability of hitting a normal figure is substantially set to 100% by making the probability of losing the normal figure extremely low. In the time saving state, even if the control of (1) is not performed (that is, the probability of hitting a normal figure is not changed from the non-time saving state), a part or all of (2) to (4) is controlled. good.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are specified as follows.

2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. In this example, since the jackpot probability is different for each set value s, the number of fluctuations ns (set value s: 1 to 6) for each set value is as follows. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "1" is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5-957. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "2" is about 1/310, the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "3" is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "5" is about 1/280, the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "6" is about 1/270, the number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. Then, the following description will be given assuming that "800", which can be applied regardless of which set value is set, is set as the number of fluctuations n. Similarly, "800", which can be applied regardless of which set value is set, is set as the time reduction number N.

It should be noted that the number of fluctuations n is set to a value that can be applied regardless of which set value is set, but it corresponds to the case where the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value may be set as long as the value to be obtained (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5-957) is set. That is, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, as the time reduction frequency N, a value that can be applied regardless of which set value is set is set, but it corresponds to the case where the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value that can be set may be used.

In this example, it is assumed that the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are the same value of 800, but the number of fluctuations n> the number of time reductions N may be satisfied, or conversely, the number of fluctuations n <the number of time reductions N may be satisfied. good.

(Variation pattern table)
10-1 and 10-2 are explanatory views showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 113IW. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for big hits excluding the relief time-shortening rush fluctuation. Further, FIG. 10-1 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 10-1 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 10-1 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for deviation in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation.

Further, FIG. 10-1 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 10-2 (F) and 10-2 (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for deviation within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (F) is a variation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. Further, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more.

If the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in FIGS. 10-2 (F) and 10-2 (G). In the period from the RAM clear to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) even if the fluctuation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Is.

Further, FIG. 10-2 (H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for deviation in the probable change state. However, in this example, even in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

Further, FIGS. 10-2 (I) and 10-2 (J) show specific examples of the variation pattern tables I and J for the loss in the relief time shortening inrush variation. Of these, the variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 10-2 (I) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, the variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 10-2 (J) is a variation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

If there is a deviation in the relief time reduction rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in FIGS. 10-2 (I) and 10-2 (J), but the RAM is cleared. In the period from the break to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected by using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) even if the relief time shortening rush fluctuation is out of order.

Further, FIGS. 10-2 (K) and 10-2 (L) show specific examples of the fluctuation pattern tables K and L for the jackpot in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation. Of these, the variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 10-2 (K) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, the variation pattern table L shown in FIG. 10-2 (L) is a variation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

In the case of a big hit in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in FIGS. 10-2 (K) and 10-2 (L), but the RAM is cleared. In the period from the break to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected by using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) even in the case of the big hit in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PB2. It is determined to be one of -3 (super reach β). It should be noted that the variation pattern for the big hit secures a special figure variation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the variation pattern for the miss that performs the same reach effect. This is a blessing effect to congratulate the big hit after performing a reach effect of the same length as the out-of-order fluctuation, and a re-lottery effect to make it appear as if the lottery is being performed again (for example, 10R big hit A). This is because the big hit symbol shown is temporarily stopped, and a re-lottery effect is performed to change to the big hit symbol indicating the 10R big hit B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is used as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of a variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), a variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), a variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and a variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C), 10-1 (D), and 10-1 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuations occur in the time-shortened state. The rate at which the pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 as compared with the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is as high as 99%. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (F), in this example, if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. For example, the fluctuation pattern can be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of being determined and determined by the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is as high as 90%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (G), in this example, if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern can be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of being determined and determined by the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is as high as 90%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probable change state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the deviation variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is shorter than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation time is high. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is shortened after playing a game for a long period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the deviation variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more reach than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of fluctuation patterns with effects is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is shortened after playing a game for a long period of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the fluctuation time averaged more than in the time-shortened state. Is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (I), in this example, when the relief time saving inrush fluctuation causes a deviation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (time saving inrush loss) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Will be done. When the variation pattern PA3-1 is determined, the time saving rush effect for notifying the transition to the time saving state (rushing) via the relief time saving is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (J), in this example, when the relief time saving inrush fluctuation causes a deviation in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (time saving promotion loss) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. NS. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 is determined, the time reduction promotion effect for notifying the transition to the time reduction state (promotion) via the relief time reduction is performed. Hereinafter, the transition from the time saving state via the time saving loss to the time saving state via the relief time saving may be referred to as "promotion".

It should be noted that the time-saving rushing effect and the time-saving promotion effect are both effects performed when the time-reduced state C is controlled, but the contents of the effect are different. Specifically, in the time saving rush effect, a character string indicating that the time saving state C is controlled is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-12 (G)), while in the time saving promotion effect, the time saving state C is displayed. A character string indicating control and promotion is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-15 (D)). Further, in the time saving rush effect, the right-handed notification image for promoting right-handedness is displayed (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), while in the time-saving promotion effect, the right-handed notification image is not displayed. (See FIG. 10-15 (D)). In this way, the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is different between the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the case of being controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. ing. As a result, the player can be given a special feeling when the time saving state is promoted, and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is common between the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the case of being controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. May be good. For example, in any case, the variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected and the time saving rush effect may be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of effect data, and save the storage capacity.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (K), in this example, when a big hit occurs due to the relief time saving rush fluctuation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (time saving rushing rush big hit). It is determined. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving rush effect is performed to notify the transition to the time-saving state (rushing) via the relief time-saving, and then a big hit is notified and a blessing effect is produced. And re-lottery production will be performed. It should be noted that the effect performed after the time-saving rush effect may be an effect that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but an effect that is not executed when another variation pattern is selected. However, this can make the player feel unexpected and special.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (L), in this example, in the case of a big hit due to the relief time saving rush fluctuation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (time saving promotion pretending big hit). It is determined. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 is determined, after the time reduction promotion effect is performed to notify the transition to the time reduction state (promotion) via the relief time reduction, it is notified that it is a big hit and a blessing effect is performed. And re-lottery production will be performed. The effect performed after the reduced working hours promotion effect may be an effect that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but is not executed when another variation pattern is selected. This may make the player feel unexpected or special.

In addition, although it was decided that the length of the fluctuation time differs depending on whether the relief time reduction rush fluctuation causes a deviation or the relief time reduction rush fluctuation results in a big hit, the fluctuation pattern having the same length of fluctuation time or common. A variation pattern may be selected. As a result, the storage capacity can be saved.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 is an example, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the extremely shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high during the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of feasible advance notice effects and look-ahead advance notice effects. For example, when the time is shortened via the relief time saving, the effect image is displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of turning on the lamp or the LED, the effect of turning on the lamp or the LED, the predetermined effect sound, or the normal effect. An effect that outputs different fluctuating stop sounds is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is provided, but the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is not provided, for example, via a big hit. The variation pattern table C (see FIG. 10-1 (C)) in the time saving state may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 10-2 (F) and (G)) are switched to. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the number of divisions such as the remaining number of fluctuations of 100 or 200 may be switched. Only in the case of, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested.

(Test terminal processing)
10-3 and 10-4 are flowcharts showing processing examples related to the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. The test terminal process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process.

In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer among the output port buffers (step 113IWS31). Then, when the jackpot symbol is being determined (Y in step 113IWS32), when the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period is in progress (Y in step 113IWS33), or when any of the time reduction flags is set (Y). Y) of step 113IWS34, the bit of the emission position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS35). The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is A, a first time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is B, and a time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is C. Is done.

When neither the jackpot symbol determination period nor the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period is set (N in step 113IWS34), the bit of the emission position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set. Is set (step 113IWS36).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state, the firing position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period is started (Y in step 113IWS32), while the time-saving out-of-time symbol is stopped in the normal state. When it is displayed, since the time saving flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the time saving out-of-time symbol ends, the firing position designation signal 3 is output at the end of the symbol stop period (step 113IWS34). Y). That is, it is configured so that the switching timing of the launch position designation signal differs depending on the trigger for shifting to the time saving state.

Further, here, by switching the outputs of the launch position designation signals 1 and 3, it is possible to notify the external device (test device) of information indicating which method the player is expected to hit in the gaming state. However, by setting / reset control of a single launch position designation signal, information indicating which game state the player is expected to hit is notified to the external device (test device). It may be a possible configuration. For example, in the case of N in step 113IWS34, the firing position is specified instead of the processing of step 113IWS36 by configuring the configuration to shift to step 113IWS37 without performing the processing of step 113IWS36, or by not performing the processing of step 113IWS31 and specifying the firing position instead of the processing of step 113IWS36. By performing the process of clearing the bit of the signal 3, information indicating which way the player is expected to hit is displayed depending on whether or not the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 is set. It may be configured so that it can be notified to an external device (test device).

Further, when the jackpot symbol determination period in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the signal per special symbol (step 113IWS37B) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit2 (step 113IWS37B). Step 113 IWS37C).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time reduction signal (step 113IWS37E) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1 when the time reduction deviation symbol determination period in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37D). (Step 113IWS37F). The processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. As will be described later, when the time saving miss symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is preferentially controlled over the time saving state via the time saving time loss, but even in that case, the time saving state is controlled. A signal indicating that the out-of-order symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit0 (step 113IWS37H) when the symbol determination period without time reduction in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37G).

Further, when the jackpot symbol determination period in the second special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the signal per special symbol 2 (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit2 (step 113IWS38B). Step 113 IWS38C).

Further, when the second special symbol is in the time saving loss symbol determination period (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time reduction loss signal (step 113IWS38E), and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit1. (Step 113IWS38F). The processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. As will be described later, when the time saving miss symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is preferentially controlled over the time saving state via the time saving time loss, but even in that case, the time saving state is controlled. A signal indicating that the out-of-order symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Further, when the second special symbol is in the period for determining the symbol without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS38G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit0 (step 113IWS38H).

Further, when the relief time reduction number is reached based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal (step 113IWS39B). Further, when the relief time reduction number is reached based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 relief count arrival signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time saving flag C is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special is set based on the flag. It is possible to identify whether the number of relief times has been shortened based on the fluctuation of the symbol. In this example, when the number of relief times shortened is reached based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the signal for reaching the number of relief times of the special symbol 1 is instantaneously output, but the relief is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. During the period controlled by the time saving state via the time saving, the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal may be continuously output. Similarly, in this example, when the number of relief times shortened is reached based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal is instantaneously output, but based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. During the period controlled by the time saving state via the relief time saving, the special symbol 2 relief number arrival signal may be continuously output.

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probabilistic state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probabilistic state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, when the probability variation flag is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special symbol is set based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether or not the probabilistic state is controlled based on the fluctuation of.

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time saving flag is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special symbol is set based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether or not the probabilistic state is controlled based on the fluctuation of.

Further, when the time saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). Further, when the time saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). Further, when the time saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As will be described later, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, each time saving flag is reset at the stop timing of the big hit fluctuation, and the time saving flag A can be set at the end of the big hit. When the 10R jackpot A occurs, the winning easy state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation to the jackpot end timing.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal by outputting the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43). By outputting the test signal in this way, the internal state of the gaming machine can be specified on the test device side.

(Customer waiting demo production control process)
FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo effect control process. The customer waiting demo effect control process is a process performed after step S161 in the effect control process process and before steps S170 to S177. That is, the customer waiting demo effect control process is a process performed every time the effect control process process is performed. In the customer waiting demo effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the telop display effect when 10 seconds have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y, S251 of step 113IWS250). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of the telop display effect is determined using the telop display execution lottery table according to the set value.

10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a telop display execution lottery table. The telop display execution lottery table is assigned a judgment value corresponding to whether or not the telop display effect is executed for each remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B). , The percentage of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for telop display execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 10-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value “1” is set. FIG. 10-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value “6” is set. The illustration of the telop display execution lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) is used, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 30%. It is decided at the rate of 70% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 40% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 60% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 50% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 50% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 55% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 45% that the telop display effect is not executed.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (B) is used, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 60%. It is decided at the rate of 40% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 30% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 20% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 15% that the telop display effect is not executed.

As described above, the execution rate of the telop display effect is higher when the number of remaining times until the relief time is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the relief time is 11 or more. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the arrival of the variation number of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player due to the end of the game immediately before the arrival of the variation number of the relief time reduction. can.

Further, as described above, the telop display effect is configured to be executed at a higher rate when the set value "6" is set than when the set value "1" is set. As a result, the player can predict the set value according to the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

In addition, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the higher the telop display effect is executed. As a result, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, depending on the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

The remaining number of times until the relief time reduction can be specified by the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. In other words, before the command to specify the number of relief time reduction 2 indicating that the relief time reduction is 200 times is received, a lottery is performed assuming that the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, and the relief time reduction is 200 times. Relief time reduction number 2 indicating that there is Relief time reduction number 2 After the designated command is received and before the relief time reduction number 2 designated command indicating that the relief time reduction is 100 times is received, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is received. Is 101 or more and 200 or less, and a lottery is performed. I do.

When it is decided to execute the telop display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display mode determination lottery process for determining the effect mode of the telop display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the telop display mode determination lottery table according to the set value is used to determine the effect mode of the telop display effect.

10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D) are explanatory views showing a telop display mode determination lottery table. The lottery table for determining the telop display mode is assigned a determination value corresponding to the telop display effect effect mode (color of the frame of the telop display area, blue, red) for each remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. In the examples shown in -6 (C) and -6 (D), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of simplification of the explanation. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for telop display mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 10-6 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set value “1” is set. FIG. 10-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set value “6” is set. The illustration of the telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6 (C) is used, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is red. It is determined at a rate of 40% to display with, and it is determined at a rate of 60% to display the color of the frame of the telop display area in blue. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 20%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined at a rate of%.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (D) is used, the color of the frame of the telop display area is red when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more. It is determined at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 20%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 90% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 10%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined at a rate of%.

In this way, the ratio of displaying the frame color of the telop display area in red is higher when the number of remaining times until the relief time is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the relief time is 11 or more. It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the number of fluctuations in the relief time to be reached.

In addition, in this way, the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red at a higher rate when the setting value "6" is set than when the setting value "1" is set. It is configured. As a result, the player can predict the set value depending on the production mode of the telop display effect.

Further, as described above, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the higher the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red. Thereby, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened depending on the production mode of the telop display effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 starts the telop display effect of displaying the telop display area of the determined mode (step 113IWS254).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie when 3 minutes have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (Y, S256 in step 113IWS255).

Regarding the telop display and demo movie display displayed here, the display ends based on the fact that the game ball passes through the start opening, the next fluctuation is started, or the player's operation is detected. It is something to do.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 113IWS1011), and if not, has not received the pre-reading notice as it is. End the setting process.

The start winning command is a disorder for the game control microcomputer 100 to determine a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. It is a command that extracts a numerical value and indicates a winning judgment result in which a display result or a fluctuation pattern is pre-read and judged based on the extracted random number value. The start winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of the start winning command include a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start winning designation command, and a total hold storage number designation command.

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of big hit. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of winning. The start winning prize designation command is an effect control command indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has a starting winning. The total hold storage number designation command is an effect control command for designating a total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

In the present embodiment, based on the variation category command, the variation is accompanied by a super reach, the variation is accompanied by a normal reach, the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream, or the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream. It is possible to specify how many times the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream or is uncertain. The undetermined case is a case where the variation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the variation pattern acquired at the time of the start winning is different depending on the number of reserved storages at the start of the variation corresponding to the start winning.

The start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they are received in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area. Then, each command stored in the start winning command storage area is stored in the first storage area 1 each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (every time the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from the ones that have been set, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of starting prize are shifted.

When a new start winning command is received in step 113IWS1011, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying a new hold display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead flag indicating that the look-ahead notice effect is being executed is set (step 113IWS1013), and if it is set, the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated as it is. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled in the time saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled in the time saving state, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

When the time reduction state is not controlled, the number of reserved storages is compared with the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction (step 113IWS1015), and if the number of reserved storages is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the value is as it is. The reading notice setting process ends. When the number of reserved storages is a value equal to or less than the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less (step 113IWS1016). If the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated as it is. If the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less, a look-ahead effect execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table is used to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed.

In the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect (first mode, second mode) for each winning judgment result (big hit, time reduction loss, time reduction no loss) ) Is assigned a judgment value.

The look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect is an effect of counting down the number of fluctuations until the change of the advance notice target of the look-ahead notice effect starts in red, and the look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect is a notice of the look-ahead notice effect. It is an effect that counts down the number of fluctuations until the start of the fluctuation of the target in blue.

For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is decided to perform the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect at a rate of 70%, and to not perform the look-ahead notice effect at a rate of 30%. If the winning determination result is out of time, it is decided to perform the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect at a rate of 40%, and it is determined not to perform the pre-reading notice effect at a rate of 60%. If the judgment result at the time of winning is that there is no reduction in working hours, it is decided to perform the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect at a rate of 4%, and to perform the look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect at a rate of 6%. It is decided not to perform the look-ahead notice production at a rate of 90%.

As described above, since the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect can be executed in the case of a big hit and the case of no time reduction, it is a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the big hit is controlled. Further, since the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect can be executed depending on the case where the time reduction is off and the case where there is no time reduction, it is a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the time reduction is controlled.

When it is determined to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the look-ahead display area and the countdown display on the image display unit 5 (step 113IWS1019), and sets the look-ahead flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by performing the process of step 113IWS1015, when the reserved storage number is a value larger than the remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, that is, in the reserved storage stored before reaching the variation of the relief time reduction. Therefore, it is configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect before and after the control of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect in the effect.

Further, by performing the process of step 113IWS1016, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted (prohibited). As a result, the countdown effect corresponding to the control of the relief time reduction and the look-ahead advance notice effect are not executed in duplicate.

For example, in a gaming machine that can execute a countdown display for reaching the number of fluctuations in the relief time and a countdown display as a look-ahead notice effect, as a countdown display and a look-ahead notice effect for reaching the number of changes in the relief time. If it is possible to execute the countdown display in duplicate, it is expected that the production will be complicated. In particular, when both the effect showing the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and the look-ahead notice effect are effects accompanied by a countdown display, it becomes difficult to understand which countdown display should be focused on, so that the effect is reduced. It is possible that it will end up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced by configuring the effect indicating the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened and the pre-reading advance notice effect so as not to be executed in duplicate.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 113IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 113IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 113IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 113IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 113IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as stop symbols, which are even-numbered symbols. (10R jackpot A symbol) is determined. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot B", the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same as odd symbols as stop symbols (10R jackpot B symbol). To decide.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) may be determined according to the time saving type.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) that reminds us of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect setting process for setting a notice effect indicating the reliability of controlling the jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the advance notice effect setting process, when it is decided whether or not to execute the advance notice effect using the advance notice effect execution lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, and when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect. In, the effect mode of the advance notice effect to be executed is determined by using the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, and the execution of the advance notice effect of the determined effect mode is set. Although not shown, the process table including the advance notice set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807, which will be described later.

The advance notice effect execution lottery table is assigned a determination value corresponding to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed for each variable display result (big hit, miss). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the advance notice effect execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the lottery table for executing the advance notice effect (number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened> 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided at a rate of 70% to execute the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is executed. It is decided not to do it at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is determined at a rate of 10% that the advance notice effect is executed, and at a rate of 90% that the advance notice effect is not executed.

When the lottery table for executing the advance notice effect (remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened ≤ 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided at a rate of 70% to execute the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is executed. It is decided not to do it at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, it is determined at a rate of 1% that the advance notice effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 99% that the advance notice effect is not executed.

In this way, the jackpot fluctuation is configured to be easier to execute the advance notice effect than the case where the jackpot fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation.

Further, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is 10 or less, the warning effect is given when the variable display result is out of order than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is greater than 10. The configuration is such that the rate of execution is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

The lottery table for determining the mode of advance notice is assigned a determination value corresponding to the mode of effect of the notice effect (color of the character to be displayed, blue, red) for each variable display result (big hit, miss). The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the advance notice effect mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect, and the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. Blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, red is determined at a rate of 10% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect, and blue is determined at a rate of 90% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect.

When the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect, and the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. Blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, red is determined at a rate of 1% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect, and blue is determined at a rate of 99% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect.

In this way, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect than in the case where the jackpot fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation.

Further, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is 10 or less, the color of the character is different when the variable display result is out of order than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is greater than 10. Red is easy to select as. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

Next, if the pre-reading flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the pre-reading advance notice effect (step 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times (step 113IWS803). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 is determined by, for example, a command for specifying the relief time reduction number 2. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it has been received.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the effect control CPU 120 has the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including a fanning effect according to the number of fluctuations is selected (step 113IWS804). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction count 2 designated command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that contains the appropriate fanning effect. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designated command is "07 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 700), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". Select a process table that includes a fanning effect according to. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the effect control CPU 120 is used until the relief time is shortened. It is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less (step 113IWS805). To check whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designated command is 10 or less. It can be determined by doing.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. (Step 113IWS806). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designated command is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until the relief time reduction is reached " Select a process table that includes a countdown effect according to "10". Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designated command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. Select a process table that includes a countdown effect according to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

In this example, a case where the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command and the relief time reduction number 2 designated command, and the fanning effect or the countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when configuring to send a background specification command that specifies a background image, it is configured to set the EXT data of the background specification command to a value according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and send it. You may. Then, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command and execute the fanning effect or the countdown effect.

Further, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, if the jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual is used, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, it may be configured to execute the variation display using a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time.

Further, in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 5 is performed. For example, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 is to perform the effect effect.

Further, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the gaming state. As a result, even when the time is controlled to the time saving state B, it is possible to execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect according to the remaining number of times, as in the case of being controlled to the normal state. However, it is possible to improve the interest by giving Hokuseki to shorten the relief time.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 10 or less (N in step 113IWS805), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS809). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 113IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 113IWS810).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display effect processing)
10-9 and 10-10 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect process (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 113IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 113IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 113IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time reduction is lost and the relief time is shortened during the normal state. However, in step 113IWS847, when the time reduction is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time reduction deviation and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time is shortened. Select the process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. Whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as the relief time reduction is determined by, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command being "00 ( It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is "H)".

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 113IWS856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 113IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the process proceeds to the process after step 113IWS858 and the symbol confirmation period is entered. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 113IWS857 and the process does not proceed to the process after step 113IWS858.

In step 113IWS861A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a target variation of the look-ahead advance notice effect (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of reserved memories when the look-ahead notice effect is started is set as the number of executions K of the look-ahead notice effect, the number of executions K is subtracted by 1 at the start of the change, and the change in which the subtraction result becomes 0 is the look-ahead notice. It can be determined that the target fluctuation of the production. If the target change of the look-ahead notice effect, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B), and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead notice effect is started, the look-ahead flag is reset when the fluctuation of the notice target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice effect is stopped, and the hold memory generated during the set of the look-ahead flag is targeted. By configuring the structure so that the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, a plurality of pre-reading notice effects are not executed in duplicate. It should be noted that a plurality of pre-reading notice effects may be duplicated and executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. 10-11 to 10-15 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the time saving state is entered. In FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15, the effect screens change in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

10-11 to 10-14 show specific examples of the effect mode when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C. FIG. 10-15 shows a specific example of the effect mode when the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol is stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, it is assumed that the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 are stopped and the detached symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "134") is derived and displayed when the remaining 700 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. At this time, the remaining rotation speed display 113IW102 stating "Relief time reduction starts in 700 rotations!" Is displayed in the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect in the short relief time is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), for example, when the remaining 600 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and come off (in this example, "423"). It is assumed that the combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 10-11 (A), the remaining rotation speed display 113IW102 stating "Relief time reduction starts with 600 rotations left!" Is displayed in the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect in the short relief time is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) and 10-11 (B), a case is shown in which a fanning effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 400 to 700 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (hence, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times), the fanning effect is performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 is received, a lottery process based on a random number is performed and it is decided to execute the fanning effect. It may be configured to perform the fanning effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) and 10-11 (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure the structure so that the execution rate of the fanning effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E), the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction. Is displayed, and the countdown display 113IW104 according to the remaining rotation speed is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, in the countdown display 113IW104, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed every time the symbol variation display ends and the symbol stops. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which out-of-order symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols of "653", "844", "278", and "216") are derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E), after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect image of the display range corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is displayed. In addition to the effect effect being displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (F) to 10-12 (H), when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0, the time reduction rush effect is performed. The symbol is stopped and the out-of-order symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "254") is stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, and the out-of-order symbol may be displayed only in the small symbol. It should be noted that FIGS. 10-12 (G) and 10-12 (H) show a state in which the out-of-order symbol as a small symbol is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol continues to fluctuate. 10-13 (I) to 10-14 (M) show a state in which the out-of-order symbol as a small symbol is definitely displayed, and the fluctuation of the special symbol is also stopped.

Further, in FIG. 10-12 (G), the control to the time saving state C is notified by displaying the character string indicating that the time saving state is controlled 800 times on the image display device 5. Then, in FIG. 10-12 (H), a right-handed promotion image for promoting right-handedness is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the case of controlling from the normal state to the time saving state C is shown here, the right-handed promotion image is displayed, but when controlling from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C, right-handing is already performed. Since this is done, the display of the right-handed notification image is restricted when the symbol is stopped (see FIG. 10-15 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (I), when the symbol determination period is entered, the mode effect start display 113IW105 saying "super heat!" Is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. After that, in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, the operation suggestion image 113IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B is operated (pressed) is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the character "press" is displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 113IW106, "V" is displayed. The character display 113IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction is started. Further, the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 10-13 (K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process for whether or not a big hit is achieved and a variation pattern type in the start winning determination process (step S101), and makes a look-ahead determination. Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 10-13 (K) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, there is a high ratio that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 10-1 (E)). ), Therefore, the variable display is digested extremely quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

If the fluctuation that reaches the relief time is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is secured, and an effect that the relief time is shortened is executed once, and then an effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. You may.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 113IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. No. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 10-12 (H), and various aspects can be considered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), the mode selection screen 113IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When the predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically confirmed. Further, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 113IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief time reduction rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the remaining rotation speed until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time is explained, and the countdown is displayed, but it may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol or during the fluctuation.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed in a variable display in which the relief time is shortened, but the symbol confirmation period is normally 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is initially set to "800" at the time of executing the RAM clear processing or at the time of a big hit is shown. When it is configured to execute a story (such as), it may also be configured to clear the selection buffer and story counter of the story. Further, it may be configured so that a story can be set when the relief time is activated, or a different story can be set according to the game state.

As described above, FIGS. 10-11 to 10-14 show a case where the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C, but FIG. 10-15 shows the case where the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C. A specific example of the production mode will be shown. For example, FIGS. 10-15 (A) and 10-15 (B) showing an example of displaying the timing of the remaining 10 rotations and the remaining 1 rotation until the transition to the relief time reduction in the time reduction state B are the remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction in the normal state. In addition to the display of FIGS. 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (E) showing an example of displaying the timing of 10 rotations and 1 rotation remaining, a right-handed notification effect (right-pointing arrow) due to the time saving state. Image display) is being performed. This right-handed notification effect is continuously performed while the time is controlled to be shortened. It is assumed that the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 10-15 (A) is 60, and the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 10-15 (B) is 51.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (C) and 10-15 (D), the time reduction promotion effect is performed when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (D), a character string indicating promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike FIG. 10-12 (H), since the time reduction state has already been controlled, the right-handed notification image is not displayed again.

It should be noted that the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced to 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player is expected to enter the relief time reduction by performing the countdown effect and the effect effect (by performing the so-called ghost effect) from a timing other than the case where the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times. It may be done. In that case, for example, the fluctuation in which the value of the time reduction counter is 50 is terminated, the next fluctuation is started, the countdown display and the effect display are started, and the countdown display and the effect display are performed over a plurality of fluctuations. The countdown display and the effect display may be ended at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third variation after the start of the countdown display and the effect display). The effect is not limited to the one performed at the timing when the value of the time reduction counter is 50, and the effect may be performed when the value of the time reduction counter is 100 or 200.

Further, the execution rate of the Gase effect may be different depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. For example, the occurrence rate may be higher as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shorter. As a result, the player can realize that the relief time is approaching, and the interest can be improved. Further, it may be assumed that this Gase effect is not performed when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by SP reach) is selected.

As described above, the feature unit 113IW includes the inventions shown below.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of fluctuations of a symbol is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit. Some are controlled to a probabilistic state based on (that is, based on a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit). Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the execution frequency of the symbol change is high) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in the effect control in the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number. Therefore, the following (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) gaming machines are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 113-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Based on the fact that the starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied, and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display.
A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met.
Decidable means that can be determined to control in an advantageous state,
Before the determination by the determination means, a determination means capable of determining that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
A specific suggestion effect suggesting that the control is controlled to an advantageous state based on the determination result by the determination means (for example, the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect. The specific example of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to the countdown display, but is a special decorative pattern. It may be an effect of stopping and displaying (chance eye), a hold change effect of changing the color or shape of the hold display, a zone effect of performing a special background display, etc.). (For example, the part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120) and
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal state,
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By doing so, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied.
A special suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps 113IWS804, S806, S254 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestion effect (for example, a fanning effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display effect) related to the establishment of a special condition. With more parts to execute)
The means of executing the specific suggestion effect is
Of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to limit the execution of the specific suggestion effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is the target of advance notice (for example). , When the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 113IWS1015, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time is prohibited by not executing 113IWS1019).
A predetermined period from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the updating means is less than the special number of times to reach a specific value. (For example, in the case of Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing step 113IWS1019, the pre-reading notice of the first aspect in the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction is restricted. A gaming machine characterized by (prohibiting the execution of production).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and to suppress the deterioration of the interest while avoiding the occurrence of defects in the production.

In this example, when the time reduction is already controlled, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time reduction is not prohibited (when the time is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1015 is not performed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the time saving state is controlled, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving may be prohibited.

Further, in this example, the special suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period from the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined number of times the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches the specific value, and the specific suggestion is performed in the predetermined period. We decided to limit the execution of the production. Specifically, it was decided to start the execution of the countdown effect from the timing when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened to 10 and prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect are not performed in duplicate, so that the effect can be suppressed from becoming complicated and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, it is decided to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects, execution of some of the pre-reading notice effects among the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects is prohibited when straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time. On the other hand, the other pre-reading notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) even when they straddle before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time.

Similarly, in this example, it is decided to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects, some of the pre-reading notice effects among the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects are prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction. The other look-ahead notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction.

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. ,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
When the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can be controlled to a special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time). By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the control to the time saving state via the relief time, the time saving time loss symbol is stopped in the fluctuation that becomes the relief time saving (the fluctuation that the relief time saving number counter = 0). If it is displayed, control to the time saving state via the relief time saving),
A special suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestion effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect) suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed based on the determination result by the determination means. The part that executes step 113IWS1019 in
The special suggestion effect executing means is a specific value from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the update means is less than the special number of times. In the predetermined period until reaching (for example, in the case of Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing 113IWS1019, the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction The execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect may be prohibited).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the production from becoming complicated, suppress the deterioration of the interest, and increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 113-3) In the means 113-1 or the means 113-2, the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less) is the predetermined period. It may be assumed that the execution rate of the special suggestion effect is higher than the previous period (for example, the period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 times or more) (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)). ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player due to the end of the game immediately before the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 113-4) In any one of the means 113-1 to the means 113-3, the special suggestion effect executing means has a plurality of effect modes depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened). The ratio of whether to execute the special suggestion effect may differ depending on which of them (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to establish the special condition and to improve the interest.

In addition to the telop display effect, if the configuration is such that whether or not to execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect, which indicate the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, is determined by lottery, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. The execution ratio may be different.

(Means 113-5) In any one of means 113-1 to 113-4, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (FIG. 10-11 (A), (Refer to (B)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

As for the explanatory effect, the execution rate and the selection rate of the effect mode may be different depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. For example, the explanation effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. In addition, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, by lowering the execution ratio of the explanation effect, the effect of the countdown effect and the effect effect suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is reduced. It may be suppressed.

(Means 113-6) In any one of the means 113-1 to the means 113-5, the special suggestion effect executing means is the first method in which it is easy to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied as the special suggestion effect. The special suggestion effect (for example, fanning effect, countdown effect) and the second special suggestion effect (for example, effect effect, telop) in which it is more difficult to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied than the first special suggestion effect. (Display effect) and can be executed (see FIGS. 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means 113-7) A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the variable display is not executed and the hold information is not stored in the hold storage means in any of the means 113-1 to 113-6. Is provided with a predetermined image display means capable of displaying (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 113IWS256).
The special suggestion effect execution means can execute the special suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) when the predetermined image is displayed (for example, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate). The order of execution of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect may be either first or at the same time), depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. , The ratio of executing the special suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed may be different (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the special suggestion effect is different when the predetermined image is displayed (FIGS. 10-6 (C), (D). )). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the special suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of times the symbol changes is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the fluctuation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there was something controlled to the probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the execution frequency of the symbol change is high) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, the interest when the special condition of the variable display number is satisfied is insufficient. Met. Therefore, the following (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) gaming machines are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 114-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state.
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special condition is set. It can be controlled to a special state when it is established,
It is possible to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a symbol with a time saving deviation) is derived and displayed in the normal state.
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
The state control means has an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is set to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fact that the relief time saving fluctuation is reached when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time saving state via the time saving time loss. Control (promote)),
When the special condition is satisfied, the notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, steps 113IWS806, S809, S845) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the time reduction rush effect, the time reduction promotion effect) for notifying the establishment is performed. Part)
The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display (for example). The effect control CPU 120 is a gaming machine characterized by executing a time saving promotion effect when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected).

According to such a configuration, when the special condition is satisfied while the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display, it is possible to give a special feeling by the notification effect. You can improve your interest.

(Means 114-2) In the means 114-1, the notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and in the special state. When the special condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the notification effect is different (for example, the effect control CPU 120 enters the time reduction state C when it is controlled from the normal state to the time reduction state C by performing steps 113IWS806, S809, S845. The effect may be executed, and the time reduction promotion effect may be executed when the time reduction state B is controlled to the time reduction state C).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player and improve the interest by performing the notification effect in a mode suitable for the situation.

In this example, the fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and the fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state are used to perform the notification effect during the fluctuation (time reduction rush effect, time reduction promotion effect). However, the execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to the change. For example, a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state, during the symbol confirmation period from the stop of the symbol to the start of the next fluctuation. The mode of effect of the notification effect to be performed may be different. In that case, a common effect may be performed during the fluctuation.

(Means 114-3) In means 114-1 or means 114-2, a launch promotion notification (for example, display of a right-handed notification image shown in FIG. 10-12 (H)) that promotes launch of a game medium toward a special route is displayed. ) Is provided (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for performing steps 113IWS806, S809, S845).
The launch promotion notification means can execute the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, while limiting the execution of the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 displays a right-handed notification image based on being controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state C (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), and is controlled from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C. Does not display the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 10-15 (D)). In FIG. 10-15 (D), the right-handed promotion image (under the small symbol) based on being controlled to the time saving state B. Although the displayed right-pointing arrow) is displayed, this right-handed promotion image is different from the right-handed notification image displayed based on the control of the time saving state C). May be good.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production.

If the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the execution of the launch promotion notification may be prohibited as shown in FIG. 10-15 (D). Alternatively, the launch promotion notification may be executed in a more passive manner than when the special conditions are satisfied in the normal state. For example, the display range may be reduced or an arrow may be transmitted to notify the launch promotion. Further, when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, the image display device 5 having a high degree of attention of the player performs launch promotion notification, while when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the degree of attention of the player is the image display device 5. A lower light emitting member or speakers 8L, 8R may be used to perform launch promotion notification.

Further, as a launch promotion notification, the launch promotion notification means is a first launch promotion notification (for example, FIG. 10-12 (H)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special route when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state. The right-pointing arrow of reference) and the second launch promotion notification (for example, the right-pointing arrow in FIGS. 10-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special path during the control of the special state. , Each of which can be executed in a different manner, and when a special condition is satisfied in a special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, while the second launch promotion notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production while performing the notification according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-3, the effect mode of the notification effect is common between when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and when the special condition is satisfied in the special state. (For example, the effect executed when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C and the effect executed when the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C are common).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of effect data, and reduce the storage capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-4, when the normal state is changed to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the variable display executed after the establishment of the special condition is subject to advance notice. While limiting the specific suggestion effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is N in step 113IWS1014, the step 113IWS1015 is executed), a special state having a low advantage (for example, for example) based on the establishment of the special condition. When transitioning from a time-saving state B) with a time reduction of 100 times to a special state with a high degree of advantage (for example, a time-saving state C with a time reduction of 800 times), a specific suggestion is made for the variable display executed after the special condition is satisfied. It may be possible to execute the effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1019 can be executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform a specific suggestion effect while suppressing the occurrence of a defect in the effect.

(Means 114-6) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-5, the special suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the special suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition in the special state. The portion in which step 113IWS806 is executed regardless of whether or not the time is shortened) may be provided.

According to such a configuration, in a special state, it is possible to expect the establishment of a special condition and improve the interest.

It should be noted that the production mode of the special suggestion effect may be different between the normal state and the time saving state. For example, the character color of the countdown effect and the color or pattern of the effect of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-6, the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern other than the variation pattern PA1-2 to PA1-4) and the predetermined variable display pattern are more variable. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a shortened variable display pattern having a shortened display period (for example, variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4). The part of the computer 100 in which step S111 is performed) is provided.
In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is non-variable in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result. When a specific display result is obtained, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern may be high (see FIGS. 10-1 (D) and (E)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the ratio of selecting the deviation of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is high even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the stress given to the player by configuring the variation pattern having a short variation time to be easily selected in the deviation variation of the time reduction state via the relief time reduction.

(Means 114-8) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-7, a plurality of variable displays including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of the reach effect. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing step S111) for determining a variable display pattern from the pattern is provided.
In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is non-variable in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result. When a specific display result is obtained, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern may be low (see FIGS. 10-1 (D) and (E)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the ratio of reach loss being selected is high, so the relief time is shortened. The stress given to the player can be reduced by configuring the variation pattern of the out-of-reach to be difficult to select in the short time state.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of times the symbol changes is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the fluctuation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there was something controlled to the probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the execution frequency of the symbol change is high) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in the control of the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number. Therefore, the following (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) gaming machines are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 115-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
A first pass area (for example, a first start winning prize) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, the left side area) among a plurality of paths on which the game medium (for example, a game ball) can move can pass. Mouth) and
A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, the right side region) different from the specific route can pass.
As the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening) and the second start condition (for example, the second). Variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and the variable display executing means (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display are executed. Part) and
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal state.
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The second starting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game medium passes through the second passing region.
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special condition is set. It can be controlled to a special state when it is established,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can shorten the time by performing step 113IWS537. Control to state A),
A special state controlled after the advantageous state (for example, a time saving state via a jackpot (time saving state A)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a time saving state via a relief time saving (time saving state C)). )) With a special output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing steps 113IWS42B, S42F) capable of executing a special output (for example, the output of the winning easy state designation signals 1 and 3) that can be distinguished from the above. ,
In a specific output means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific output (for example, an output of a launch position designation signal 3) that can specify that a game medium should be launched toward a special path in a special state. , The part where step 113IWS35 is performed), and further
The specific output means can execute the specific output in common between the special state controlled after the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. A gaming machine characterized in that step 113IWS35 is commonly performed regardless of which time reduction flag is set).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the opportunity to be controlled to the special state, and it is possible to standardize the specific signal. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the opportunity to be controlled in the time saving state is the occurrence of a big hit or the relief time saving.

Further, in this example, a signal output that can distinguish between the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving is output to the test device, and either the time saving state via the big hit or the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. It is assumed that it is possible to output a signal that can specify that it should be hit right even when it is controlled to, but similarly to an external device such as a hall management computer, the time saving state via a big hit is also possible. It is possible to output a signal that can distinguish between the time saving state via the rescue time saving and the time saving state via the rescue time saving, and it is possible to specify that it should be right-handed regardless of whether it is controlled by the time saving state via the jackpot or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be possible to output signals in common. As a result, in the hall management computer, it is possible to analyze the operation such as the relief time reduction arrival rate in actual operation and the customer base of the player when the relief time reduction is reached, and to standardize the signal. be able to.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. ,
The special output means has a special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a time saving state via a time saving loss (time saving state B)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a time saving state B). For example, it is possible to execute a special output (for example, the output of the winning easy state designation signals 2 and 3) that can be distinguished from the time saving state (time saving state C) via the relief time saving (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100). , Step 113 IWS42D, S42F).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the opportunity to be controlled to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the trigger for being controlled in the reduced working hours state is the reduced working hours symbol stop or the relief working hours.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or the means 115-2, the state control means is in a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Is controllable and
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
When the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can be controlled to a special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time). By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the control to the time saving state via the relief time, the time saving time loss symbol is stopped in the fluctuation that becomes the relief time saving (the fluctuation that the relief time saving number counter = 0). If it is displayed, it may be controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving).

According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to the means 115-3, when the state control means derives and displays a special display result (for example, a time-saving missed symbol) different from the specific display result in the normal state. Can be controlled to a special state,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the special condition is satisfied, the signal control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that performs processing related to the output of a signal that can identify that the special display result is derived and displayed. Even if the variation causes a relief time reduction, it may be provided with a portion for performing step 113IWS37E when the time reduction deviation symbol is stopped and displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display result can be appropriately notified to the outside.

Further, the contents shown in the feature unit 113IW may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 105-1) to (means 107-15).

(Means 105-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. A possible state control means and an update means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of the variable display are provided, and the state control means is specified as a display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after the display result is controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation display, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value corresponding to (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 shortens the relief time when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes. (Update the number of times counter), there are multiple types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state (for example, 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (for example, 10R jackpot B), and control to any of the plurality of advantageous states. The advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether or not the special state is controlled, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. It is higher than the advantage of the controlled special state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and after the 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit occurs. ), The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state (for example, 100 mainly after the 10R jackpot A). It may be controlled to the time saving state of the times, and may be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving. According to such a configuration, the relief degree of the player can be increased.

(Means 105-2) Controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. After that, the ratio controlled to the special state of special advantage (for example, the time saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) is different (for example, the big hit type when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The selection ratio is different, and the special condition is satisfied when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The number of executions of the variable display for this is the same for the special number of times (for example, relief after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol). The number of fluctuations required for the time reduction may be 800 times in common). According to such a configuration, when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. While enhancing the interest by demonstrating different playability, the special number of times is common between the case of variable display of the first identification information and the case of variable display of the second identification information, resulting in excessive gambling. It is possible to suppress the increase to.

(Means 105-3) The disadvantage setting value (for example, the setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability (for example, about 1/319) and the control in the more advantageous state than the first probability. A setting that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") which is a second probability (for example, about 1/270) having a high probability of being set. The advantage of the special state, which is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is more likely to be satisfied when the special condition is provided and the disadvantage setting value is set than when the advantageous setting value is set. It is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is 800 times. It may be controlled to a time saving state. According to such a configuration, even when a disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is. By being higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and any of a plurality of types after being controlled in an advantageous state. Whether it is controlled to the special state of advantage is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set. Yes, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same regardless of which set value is set (for example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving is any). It may be common regardless of whether the set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and to realize sound playability. be able to.

(Means 105-5) Of a plurality of types, one is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and the other is controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. And, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is common (for example, the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the second special symbol. It may be possible to control to the time saving state of 800 times in both cases of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first identification information. According to such a configuration, the variable display of the first identification information can be performed. Any set value is set for the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied, while exhibiting different playability between the case of performing the game and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information. Since it is common at times, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling and to obtain an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 105-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-2) having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including PA1-4) is provided. Is shortened and variable when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The rate of determining the display pattern is high (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, and in the time reduction state via the jackpot. The variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern tables C and H shown in FIGS. 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time is short) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. ..

(Means 105-7) A variable display pattern determining means (means 105-7) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. For example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step S111) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is controlled after the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the special state (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, FIG. 10-1. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in (E), and the fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time saving state via the jackpot). .. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the game being played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 105-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, a time reduction counter) different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means is special. It is possible to control the special state by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the specific numerical information is stored a predetermined number of times (for example) in the special state. , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on the predetermined value (for example, the value of the time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means updates the numerical information and the specific numerical value even if the power supply is stopped. Backup when a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and special information setting information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. It is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the storage means, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and initializes the numerical information. It may not be set (for example, the presence / absence of the time reduction flag set and the value of the time reduction counter are reset, while the value of the relief time reduction counter is not reset). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 106-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is easier to be executed than a normal state. Possible state control means, update means that can update numerical information (eg, rescue time reduction counter) based on the execution of variable display, and start conditions (eg, first start winning opening or second start winning). A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, neither a big hit game state nor a variable state) as well as a winning of a game ball to the mouth) and a start condition. The hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage number buffer and the second hold storage number buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display as hold information when the start condition is not satisfied, and the power supply is stopped. When a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and hold information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. Initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, numerical information updated by the update means based on the storage contents of the backup storage means when power supply is started, and hold information stored by the hold storage means. The state control means includes a recovery means (for example, a part for executing step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing recovery control, and the state control means variably displays the numerical information updated by the update means. By setting a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied, and it is restored. After the control is executed, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the recovered pending information, and the update means executes the variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the information is changed or the second identification information is variablely displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is relieved when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes. (Update the time reduction counter). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player when a power failure occurs while optimizing the control by initialization.

(Means 106-2) It is controlled to an advantageous state when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. After that, the ratio controlled to the special state of special advantage (for example, the time saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) is different (for example, the big hit type when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The selection ratio is different, and the special condition is satisfied when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The number of executions of the variable display for this is the same for the special number of times (for example, relief after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol). The number of fluctuations required for the time reduction may be 800 times in common). According to such a configuration, when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. While enhancing the interest by demonstrating different playability, the special number of times is common between the case of variable display of the first identification information and the case of variable display of the second identification information, resulting in excessive gambling. It is possible to suppress the increase to.

(Means 106-3) The disadvantage setting value (for example, the setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability (for example, about 1/319) and the control in the more advantageous state than the first probability. A setting that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") which is a second probability (for example, about 1/270) having a high probability of being set. The advantage of the special state, which is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is more likely to be satisfied when the special condition is provided and the disadvantage setting value is set than when the advantageous setting value is set. It is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is 800 times. It may be controlled to a time saving state. According to such a configuration, even when a disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is. By being higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) A setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and any of a plurality of types after being controlled in an advantageous state. Whether it is controlled to the special state of advantage is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set. Yes, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same regardless of which set value is set (for example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving is any). It may be common regardless of whether the set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and to realize sound playability. be able to.

(Means 106-5) Of a plurality of types, one is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and the other is controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. And, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is common (for example, the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the second special symbol. It may be possible to control to the time saving state of 800 times in both cases of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first identification information. According to such a configuration, the variable display of the first identification information can be performed. Any set value is set for the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied, while exhibiting different playability between the case of performing the game and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information. Since it is common at times, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling and to obtain an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 106-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-2) having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including ~ PA1-4) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied. , When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is higher than that of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, the relief time is shortened). In the time saving state via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), and in the time saving state via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) is used. You may also select a pattern). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time is short) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. ..

(Means 106-7) A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. In the case of, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. In the time saving state via the big hit, the fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H)). According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the game being played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 106-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, a time reduction counter) different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means is special. It is possible to control the special state by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the specific numerical information is stored a predetermined number of times (for example) in the special state. , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on the predetermined value (for example, the value of the time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means updates the numerical information and the specific numerical value even if the power supply is stopped. Backup when a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and special information setting information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. It is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the storage means, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and initializes the numerical information. It may not be set (for example, the presence / absence of the time reduction flag set and the value of the time reduction counter are reset, while the value of the relief time reduction counter is not reset). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. The state control means includes a possible state control means and an update means that can update the numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means is the numerical information updated by the update means. However, by setting a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied. The updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. When the 1st special symbol changes and the 2nd special symbol changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated), and suggestion effects related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, fanning effect, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display effect) are performed. Further provided with a feasible suggestion effect execution means, the suggestion effect execution means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a countdown effect). In, the selection ratio of the numerical value to be displayed is different (the numerical value according to the remaining number of times until the relief time is selected at the ratio of 100%, but the value to be displayed is selected by the ratio according to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened by lottery. The effect display range is different in the effect production (it is displayed at a rate of 100% in the range according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, but it depends on the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. The range to be displayed may be determined by lottery), the color of the telop display area is different in the telop display effect (see FIGS. 10-6 (C), (D)), and the effect mode of the suggestion effect is , It may be an embodiment suggesting a period until the special condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The effect mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the countdown effect) is an mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified (see FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12). It may be that. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-3) The suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image (for example, an effect effect of displaying an effect image), and the specific image is a color and size (size of a single image and a plurality of images). At least one of (including the size of the display range) is displayed in a plurality of different modes, and the period until the special condition suggested by which mode is displayed is different (FIGS. 10-11 and 10-). 12) may be used. According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on the aspect of the specific image and improve the interest.

(Means 107-4) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the fact that is satisfied, and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, the first). A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) can be displayed when the variable display is not executed and the reserved storage is not stored in the reserved storage means (1 hold storage number buffer, 2 hold storage number buffer). An image display means and a suggestion effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect). It is possible to execute in duplicate. The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect may be first or at the same time), and the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. Depending on the number of times of execution of the above, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed may be different (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-5) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the fact that is satisfied, and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, the first). A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) can be displayed when the variable display is not executed and the reserved storage is not stored in the reserved storage means (1 hold storage number buffer, 2 hold storage number buffer). An image display means and a suggestion effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect). It is possible to execute in duplicate. The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect may be first or at the same time), and the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. Depending on the number of times of execution of the above, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect may differ depending on the predetermined mode when the predetermined image is displayed (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-6) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the variable) is satisfied. A variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the fact that is satisfied, and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, the first). A predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) can be displayed when the variable display is not executed and the reserved storage is not stored in the reserved storage means (1 hold storage number buffer, 2 hold storage number buffer). The suggestion effect executing means includes an image display means, and the suggestion effect execution means detects that the operation means (for example, the hitting ball operation handle 30) has been operated and a predetermined area (for example, the first start) when the predetermined image is displayed. It is assumed that the suggestion effect (for example, the dialogue effect by voice output) can be executed based on at least one of the detection that the game medium has passed through the winning opening or the second starting winning opening. May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means capable of setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is set to any setting value. Depending on the situation, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) may be different (see FIGS. 10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means capable of setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is set to any setting value. Depending on the situation, the ratio of performing the suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) may differ depending on the specific mode (for example, “red”) (see FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6 (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-9) It is possible to execute a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value. Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of Modification 1 that executes the setting suggestion effect as a changing effect), and the setting suggestion effect execution means is set to any setting value. The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means may have the same ratio of executing the suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

(Means 107-10) It is possible to execute a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value. Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of Modification 1 that executes the setting suggestion effect as a changing effect), and the setting suggestion effect execution means is set to any setting value. The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the special mode (for example, the second mode), and the suggestion effect execution means has a specific mode (for example, ". It may be assumed that the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is the same by "red"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

(Means 107-11) The suggestion effect executing means is a case where the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and a case where the recovery process is executed, and in a specific period after the power supply is started. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the display of the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened) may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-12) A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2). The variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and the special variable display pattern can be determined before the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed without determining (for example, the variable patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 can be changed only when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0). , A specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect) for notifying that the special state is controlled may be further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and at the same time, the player can be clearly notified of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

(Means 107-13) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 without reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern (for example, reach effect) having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3 and PB2-1 to PB2-3) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is provided. The specific variable display pattern can be determined regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not (see FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2) and is variable. When the display result of the display is a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (see FIG. 10-1 (A)), and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (see FIG. 10-1 (A)). For example, the variable period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less is more variable than the period before the predetermined period (for example, the variable period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 11 times or more). When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, the variation shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 11 times or more. When the variation pattern is selected using the pattern table and the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the selection ratio of the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in FIGS. 10-2 (F) and 10-2 (F) and (G) is selected. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table changed to 0%). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-14) A notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect executing means displays a variable display. In both cases where the result is a specific display result and not a specific display result, the advance notice effect can be executed, and the case where the variable display display result is the specific display result is the specific display result. When the rate of executing the notice effect is higher than in the case where the notice effect is not satisfied, and the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. In addition, it may be assumed that the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-15) Execution of step 113IWS802A in the effect control CPU 120, which is capable of executing the advance notice effect for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The notice effect executing means has a specific mode (for example, "red") and a predetermined mode regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is a specific display result or not. (For example, "blue") can execute the advance notice effect, and when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is higher than the predetermined mode, and the special condition is satisfied. In the predetermined period before the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode may be lower than the period before the predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Explanation of feature 116IW)
Next, the feature portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to one of a low probability / low base state (normal state), a low probability / high base state, a high probability / high base state, and a high probability / low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, which is compared with the normal state. In the game, the probability of becoming a "hit" is higher. For example, the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time-saving state. Will be easier to win. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening) is obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize. Further, in the configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) shown in FIG. 1 is provided, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is used as compared with the normal state. You may make it easier for the game ball to win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the high probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is higher than in the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as a time saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as a probabilistic state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state) after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is displayed. It may be controlled to the time saving state (high base state) based on the derivation display. Hereinafter, the time saving state (high base state) in which the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled after the big hit game is completed is also referred to as a time saving state via the big hit, and the time saving state controlled based on the derivation display of the time saving out-of-time symbol is displayed. (High base state) is also referred to as a time saving state via a time saving deviation.

Further, in this example, even if the next big hit does not occur even after the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the big hit occurs, the time is shortened. It may be controlled to a state (high base state) (hereinafter, the time saving state controlled by such a process (high base state) is also referred to as a time saving state via the relief time saving, or simply a relief time saving. Also called). In this example, after the relief time reduction occurs, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished without the next big hit, the relief time reduction is not controlled again. However, not limited to such a configuration, if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed without the next big hit occurring even after the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction is controlled again. It may be configured so that it may occur. Further, for example, even if the next big hit or the time reduction deviation does not occur even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed after the time reduction deviation occurs, the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is controlled. It may be configured so that it may occur.

In the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening) and variable. Control to lengthen the opening time of the winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed. All controls may be performed, or some of (1) to (4) may not be controlled. For example, which of (1) to (4) may be controlled differs between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, in a low base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be 1/1, or the probability of hitting a normal figure may be extremely low and the probability of hitting a normal figure may be substantially 1/1. That is, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control of the above (1) is not performed, a part or all of the above (2) to (4) are controlled so that the high base state is obtained. May be.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are specified as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, in the case of the set value "6" having the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so that the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810 and the number of time reductions N is 108 to. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time reductions N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and even when they are set to any of the set values, the above provisions are satisfied. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above-mentioned provision at least in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 108IW, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

(First Embodiment)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described.

(Time saving type)
FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In this example, the time saving state (high base state) is the time saving state A via the jackpot (low probability / high base state) and the time saving state via the time saving loss (low probability / high base state). It is possible to distinguish between the state B and the time saving state C which is the time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the relief time saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when 6R jackpot A is generated during the normal state (low base state) and controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving is 100 times. When the 6R jackpot A is generated during the time saving state (high base state) and controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. With such a configuration, the advantage can be different depending on the game state, and the interest can be improved. In this example, when any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, the time is shortened until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game, regardless of whether the occurrence state is the normal state or the time saving state. It is controlled to a state (high base state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when the time reduction occurs during the normal state and the time reduction state is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction state (high base state) is performed 100 times. State) is controlled. On the other hand, if the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction count is not updated. That is, when the time reduction state (high base state) and the remaining number of times controlled to the time reduction state (high base state) is 50 times, even if the time reduction deviation occurs, the time reduction state (high base state) is controlled. The remaining number of times to be done remains 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, the time reduction deviation that occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) is substantially invalid. Further, in this example, as will be described later, the time saving may not be determined in the probabilistic state (high probability state).

The method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11-1. For example, when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled in the time reduction state (high base state) is set again (for example, set to 100 times). However, if the time reduction occurs only during the time reduction state (high base state) via the time reduction state (high base state), it is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state). It may be configured so that the remaining number of times is set again. Further, for example, even when a symbol that is out of time reduction is derived and displayed, it is controlled to 100 times of time reduction in the normal state, and is controlled to 0 times of time reduction in the time reduction state (that is, time reduction). It may be configured to fall from the state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of such a time reduction deviation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to 800 times. As described above, in this example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the time saving loss because the number of time saving is large.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this example, when the relief time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) via the big hit or the time reduction deviation, the relief time reduction is updated while the relief time reduction is performed. It is configured so that the number of time reductions is not updated when the time reduction occurs during the including time reduction state (high base state). With such a configuration, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving can be secured, and the relief degree of the player can be increased (for example, the investment amount of the player can be suppressed).

In this example, even if the variation display of 800 times is finished without the big hit after being controlled to the time reduction state of 800 times by the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction is not controlled again.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. The relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the big hit gaming state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.
K = (1-ML) n = {(P-1) ÷ P} n
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

(Variation pattern table)
11-2 to 11-4 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the first embodiment of the feature portion 116IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4, 14 types of first variation patterns # A to #N for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. Thirteen types of #A to #M are used.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first special symbol for the low probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (A). The variation pattern table A is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first variation patterns # A to # It is determined to be one of F.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), for the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). The variation pattern table B for the first special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), in the case of a high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first variation pattern # G ~ # I is determined.

In the variation pattern table B for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), each first variation pattern # G is compared with the variation pattern table A for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 11-2 (A). The fluctuation time specified by ~ # I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed. Will be done.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), for the high probability / high base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). The variation pattern table C for the first special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the case of a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the first variation pattern # A In addition to ~ # F, it is determined to be one of the first fluctuation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the case of a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is off or a small hit, the first When the number of 1-held storages is 0, the first fluctuation patterns # J and # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the low probability / high base state, the variation for the first special symbol for the low probability / high base state shown in FIG. 11-3 (D). The pattern table D is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state, in addition to the first variation patterns # A to #F. It is determined to be one of the first fluctuation patterns # J, # K, and # L.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), in the low probability / high base state, if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is off or a small hit, the first reserved storage number is 0. If, the first fluctuation pattern # J, # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined. Further, as will be described later, the low probability / high base state ends when the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times is executed, but when the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation of the low probability / high base state is executed, the fluctuation time is executed. It is determined to be the first fluctuation pattern # L (special fluctuation pattern) which is 5 seconds.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened (when the value of the relief time reduction counter to be described later becomes 0), FIG. 11-3 (E). The variation pattern table E for the first special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established as shown in the above is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (E), if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the case of the variation display that shortens the relief time, either one of the first variation patterns # M and # N is executed. Will be decided.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-3, the first variation patterns # M and #N are not used for the variation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, and are used only for the variation display that results in the relief time reduction. It is a time-specific fluctuation pattern. In this example, when the first fluctuation pattern #M (relief time reduction inrush loss) is determined, the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) as described later. ) The time-saving rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)) for notifying the fact is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state), and the interest when the relief time is shortened is improved. be able to.

Further, when the first fluctuation pattern # N (relief time reduction rushing pretending big hit) is determined, the time reduction for notifying that the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) is notified. After performing an effect in the same manner as the inrush effect (for example, see FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-23 (C)), an effect for notifying that a big hit will be executed is executed. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the second for the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). The variation pattern table A for a special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second variation pattern # A In addition to ~ # F, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the case of a high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is off or a small hit, the first 2 When the number of reserved storages is 0, the second fluctuation patterns # J and # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the second reserved storage number is 1 or more, the second fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is not in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), it is for a time other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B). The second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed when the probability / low base state (first probability variation state) is not high, the second variation pattern # G to Determined to be one of #I.

In the second variation pattern table B for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), each second variation pattern # G is compared with the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). The fluctuation time specified by ~ # I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, in a state other than the high probability / low base state (first probability change state) (low probability / low base state, high probability / high base state (second probability change state), low probability / high base state). When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the long variation with the variation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened (when the value of the relief time reduction counter described later becomes 0), FIG. 11-4 (C). The second special symbol variation pattern table E for when the relief time reduction is established as shown in the above is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the case of the variation display that shortens the relief time, either of the second variation patterns # L and #M. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, the second fluctuation patterns # L and #M are not used for the fluctuation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but are used only for the fluctuation display that results in the relief time reduction. Is. In this example, when the second fluctuation pattern # L (relief time reduction inrush loss) is determined, the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) as described later. ) The time-saving rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)) for notifying the fact is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state), and the interest when the relief time is shortened is improved. be able to. Further, when the second fluctuation pattern # M (relief time reduction rushing pretending big hit) is determined, the time reduction for notifying that the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) is notified. After performing an effect in the same manner as the inrush effect (for example, see FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-23 (C)), an effect for notifying that a big hit will be executed is executed. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the same fluctuation pattern table is used (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same) in each of the time reduction state via the jackpot, the time reduction state via the missed time reduction, and the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. ), But it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (that is, the average fluctuation time is different) depending on the time reduction state via the jackpot, the time reduction state via the off time reduction, and the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. For example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more likely to be determined by the fluctuation pattern with the shortened fluctuation time than the time saving state via the jackpot or the missed time saving, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. May be good. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) at the time of the loss. It may not be (or less determined) and the average variation time may be shorter. With such a configuration, if the relief time is shortened (that is, if a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the reach (or the reach with particularly high expectations) will not be missed, so the decline in interest should be suppressed. Can be done.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
11-5 to 11-7 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 061IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 061IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are used. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / low base, and the low probability / low base background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / high base, and the low probability / high base background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / low base state is determined and the high accuracy / low base background specification command is executed. Send.

Regarding the processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) for transmitting the background designation command according to the current gaming state to the effect control CPU 120, the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later) ), It may be executed after the update process of the relief time reduction counter and the high base count counter and the control process related to the high base flag are performed. That is, when the relief time reduction counter is updated at the start of fluctuation and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled by the establishment of the relief time reduction, the low accuracy / high base background specification command is immediately transmitted. When the background is changed or the high base count counter is updated and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) ends and the normal state is controlled, the low accuracy / low base background specification command is immediately sent. You may change the background.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, when the process of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later) is executed to be in a probabilistic state (high probability state), the number of relief times after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) is shortened. Do not execute counter update processing. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the probabilistic change state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened does not decrease even if the fluctuation display is executed, and the case is in the non-probability change state (low probability state). Only, when the fluctuation display is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases. Not limited to the configuration of this example, even in the case of a probabilistic change state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be uniformly reduced when the fluctuation display is executed.

When the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Regardless of whether it is done or not, the value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly. That is, in this example, the relief time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started and the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started. With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the relief time reduction counter.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data to reduce the relief time. Control is performed to transmit the number 1 designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" in the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the total number of variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state is 800 times. It is controlled to (low probability / high base state). In addition, if the state in which the relief time reduction occurs is a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via a big hit or a time reduction deviation, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 800 times of time reduction is performed again. Be controlled. Therefore, in this example, if the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing or the big hit game is completed, the relief time reduction occurs and the time reduction state is controlled. It will be.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the time saving loss. Is high. Then, in this example, when the relief time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) via the jackpot or the time reduction loss due to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later), the number of time reductions is performed. Is configured to be updated. For example, if the time saving state (high base state) via the big hit or the time saving time loss and the remaining number of times controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is 50 times, when the relief time saving occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the base state) is updated to 800 times. On the other hand, in this example, when the time reduction state (high base state) including the relief time reduction occurs due to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later, the number of time reductions is updated. It is configured not to be. For example, in the time saving state (high base state) via the relief time saving, when the remaining number of times controlled by the time saving state (high base state) is 500 times, even if the time saving deviation occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the state) remains 500 times and is not updated. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

Further, in this example, the relief time is shortened by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B described later). When the loss is derived and displayed, it is configured to be controlled to the time saving state by the relief time saving, which has a higher advantage than the time saving loss. Specifically, when the variation display (out of time reduction) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started, the normal state (low probability / low base state) is changed to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). The transition control is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, even if the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened, the advantage of the time reduction state due to the relief time can be secured, and the relief degree of the player can be increased (for example, the player). It is possible to curb the investment amount of.

Further, in this example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 and the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the high base number counter is set to "800", but the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800". Not set. When the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed after the relief time reduction occurs or when a big hit occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a big hit after the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction does not occur (that is, the relief time reduction is 800 times). It is not controlled continuously in a short time).

Specifically, when the variation display for 800 times of time reduction is executed without a big hit in the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction ends and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is,). No new relief time reduction will occur). Further, even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without the big hit occurring in the transitioned normal state, the relief time reduction does not occur. After the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction occurs again. For example, after the relief time reduction occurs, a big hit occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and 800 times after the big hit game ends. If the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed, or after the relief time reduction occurs, the RAM clear processing is executed and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and 800 after the RAM clear processing. This is the case when the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display of the times is executed.

Not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" when the relief time reduction occurs, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to 1 each time the variation display is executed in the relief time reduction. By subtracting, a new relief time reduction may be established at the same time as the end of the relief time reduction, and the relief time may be continuously controlled until the next big hit occurs.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter, and the relief time reduction counter is not updated during the relief time reduction, so that a big hit occurs in the relief time reduction. Even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed without doing so, it is not controlled by the relief time reduction (that is, it is not continuously controlled by the relief time reduction of 800 times of time reduction), but a big hit occurs after the relief time reduction is completed. If the variable display is executed 800 times, the relief time may be shortened.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter and "200" is set in the high base number counter, so that a big hit does not occur in the relief time reduction. When the variation display for 200 times of time reduction is executed, the relief time reduction ends and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is entered, and the variation display of 600 times is performed without a big hit in the transitioned normal state. When executed, the relief time may be shortened.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), a value larger than "800" may be set in the high base number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a plurality of types of values corresponding to the number of time reductions may be configured to be set in the high base number counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the high base count counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the high base count counter. You may.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process is used as a high base number counter. It may be configured to be set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5609A). By the process of step 061IWS5609A, in the first variation pattern setting process described later, it is possible to specify that the variation display is such that the relief time reduction is established, and to determine the variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS5610A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610A). 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later), in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when the relief time reduction is established. That is, in this example, in the low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball launch operation (right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. If the right-handed display 26 is already lit, such as when the relief time is shortened in the time saving state, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) may be omitted.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, Or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction count counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and the relief time reduction count 2 Control is performed to send the designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9608 (H) as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction, and sends a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction to suggest that the relief time reduction is established, or an effect suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction (for example, a fanning effect described later). And countdown effect) may be executed.

Further, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which the relief time reduction can be continuously generated, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command are transmitted only when the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. When the relief time is shortened after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 designated command or the relief time reduction number 2 designated command may not be transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, it is controlled by one of low probability / low base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / high base state, and high probability / low base state. It is controlled to either the / high base state or the high probability / high base state. However, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), the high probability / high base state (second probability change state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, which will be described later). (See S2274), the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base number counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base number counter is not "0", it is controlled to the low probability / high base state.

In the first embodiment, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A. When controlled to the / high base state, when controlled to the low probability / high base state via the time saving gap, and when controlled to the low probability / high base state via the relief time saving. In this example, when controlled to a low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are performed a predetermined number of times in total (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times). (See FIG. 11-1) Based on the execution, the low probability / high base state is terminated and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is entered.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 061IWS5618A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter does not reach "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether it is done.

When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, when Y is determined in step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later), the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times) in total. Times. See FIG. 11-1) It is determined that the execution has been performed, the process of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed, the low probability / high base state is terminated, and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is executed. Will be migrated to.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification until the variation display ends and continuing the right-handed state.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a big hit is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A without performing the processing after step 061IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 061IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 061IWS59A at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 061IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 061IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. Specifically, when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and is controlled to a time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and the time saving state ( When a 6R jackpot A is generated during (high base state) and controlled to a time saving state (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to 200 times. With such a configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is performed by the relief time reduction counter of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and steps 061IWS5602B to S5608B). It is configured to be executed after the update process and the high base flag setting process.

Therefore, in this example, when the display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is a big hit, the advantage of the time reduction state controlled after the end of the big hit game is determined assuming that the big hit has occurred in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. NS. Specifically, when the display result of the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is 6R jackpot A, it is assumed that 6R jackpot A has occurred in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction, and the time reduction state is 200 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is controlled (the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284 and S2286 to S2287 described later). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player by shortening the relief time (for example, suppressing the investment amount of the player).

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63A). ), The process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

If the big hit is not made in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS65A). Step 061IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. As for the small hit type, a plurality of types may be provided so that the opening pattern (that is, the ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening) is different, or only one may be provided. .. When there is only one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Further, when the small hit is not made in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS69A). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state)), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, when the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later) is executed and the probability change state (high probability state) is reached, the time saving determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is performed. It is decided to leave it as it is without shortening the time without doing.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is in a low probability state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not to make a time saving loss determination. A lottery process is performed based on a random number, and it is determined whether or not the time reduction is lost (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is decided that the time reduction will be lost with a probability of about 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In this example, when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction frequency is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later), which is substantially invalid. The time saving is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, when the time saving state (high base state) is set, the time saving deviation determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is not executed, and the time saving is performed as it is. It may be configured to be determined in.

Further, for example, among the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving, in the case of the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving deviation of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is determined. In the case of the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss, the time saving determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may be executed without executing the process. That is, the time reduction may not occur in the case of the time reduction via the relief time reduction, and the time reduction may occur in the case of the time reduction state via the jackpot and the time reduction state via the time reduction deviation.

When multiple types of time reduction deviations are provided and the advantages (for example, the number of time reductions) are configured to be different, for example, a value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area is supported. Determine the type as the type that is out of time. Further, in this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Further, in this case, in addition to the large hit type determination and the small hit type determination, the determination process may be performed using a common type determination random number in the time saving type determination.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is decided to use the 6R jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is determined to be the 6R jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "3". If it is decided to use 6R jackpot C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is decided to use 6R jackpot D, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "7". If it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be out of time, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "2". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the relief fluctuation flag is set, that is, when the relief fluctuation time is satisfied, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092A) to determine the fluctuation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table E for the first special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established shown in FIG. 11-3 (B) is selected (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

If the relief variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the probability variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the low probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 11-2 (A). The first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (that is, low probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 11-3 (D) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) Is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability / high base state (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). The first special symbol variation pattern table B for the high probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (that is, in the high probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). The first special symbol variation pattern table C for the high probability / high base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 has a variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, S1716A, and a variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3 should be used (step 061IWS1717A).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 061IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 061IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707A).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the variation pattern table for the first special symbol is executed. B is selected and the variation display of the long variation is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation display of the variation time is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern table E for the first special symbol is selected, and the variation display dedicated to the relief time reduction is executed.

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 11-9 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not been transmitted yet, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), controls to send the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1123A). Step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y of step 061IWS1125A) or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 is the third to the effect control CPU 120. 1 Control is performed to send a compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In such a case, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129A. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, when the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the stop symbol of the variation display that shortens the relief time, the control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not performed. Further, even when the stop symbol of the variation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not performed (steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, which will be described later). See S1129B). That is, in this example, even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the one Do not forcibly stop the variable display of the special symbol of.

In this example, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit, or when it is a big hit. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type (for example, 6R jackpot B) having a high degree of advantage, the variation display of the first special symbol may not be forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol variation process may be terminated as it is. .. In this case, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126) based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the small hit game. Move to. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 061IWS1120A, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a large hit with a high advantage, is being executed, the first is performed during the small hit game. The update of the fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
11-10 and 11-11 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 061IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B, the time saving state (100th, 200th, or 800th; see FIG. 11-1) is started. By ending the low probability / high base state and shifting to the normal state (low probability / low base state) and executing the processes of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B, the predetermined times (100th time, 200th time) The right-handed display 26 is turned off at the end of the variation display of the 800th time or the 800th time (see FIG. 11-1).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 061IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 061IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. It may be configured to start lighting the display 26.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step 061IWS2030A). It should be noted that whether or not the case is determined to be out of time can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). Then, when the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability / high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

When the high base flag is not set (in this example, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the time reduction does not occur, so in the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 103 performs the time reduction. The high base flag is set based on the occurrence of the loss (step 061IWS2032A). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, when a time reduction deviation occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state) due to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later), the time reduction state (low probability / high) of 100 times of time reduction occurs. When the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled and the time reduction occurs, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is continued and the time reduction count (that is, the value of the high base count counter) is changed. Not updated.

In this example, the number of time reductions is not updated when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) including the relief time reduction by the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later). It is configured. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

In this example, the number of time reductions (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is not updated when the time reduction occurs in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). Not limited to this, for example, when the time reduction occurs (or in the time reduction state) in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via the jackpot or the time reduction via the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). When the remaining number of times is less than 100 times due to the time reduction loss), the time reduction number (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is updated and controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 100 times. May be done.

In step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be configured to be set in the high base number counter. For example, if the time reduction is missed the first time, "100" is set in the high base count counter, and if the time reduction is lost the second time, "200" is set in the high base count counter. You may.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process is used as a high base number counter. It may be configured to be set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 90% and 200 times with a probability of 10%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described later), in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when the time reduction occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036A).

In this example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not set to "800" (that is, the remaining number of times until the relief time is not reset) is not set when the time reduction is lost, but the configuration is limited to such a configuration. Instead, set the value of the relief time reduction counter to "800" (that is, reset the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction) even when the time reduction occurs, such as when a big hit occurs or a relief time reduction occurs. May be good.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-11, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, and when the time reduction is lost, the player is on the right side of the game area. It is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the gate notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may.

In addition, right-handed notification and gate notification are not executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, and right-handed notification and gate notification are executed when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening in that state. (In this case, since it is in the gate waiting state, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the change display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and it becomes the first hold memory). You may.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is, when there is a possibility that the right-handed operation is performed), the recognition degree May be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area by means of a low-value mode (for example, low-volume sound output or small screen display). .. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (or the special winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area) is detected in the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is, the right-handed operation is intended). If it is presumed that this is done in a certain manner), it may be configured to perform left-handed notification in a mode having a high degree of recognition (for example, a loud sound output or a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls on the right side of the game area such as the passing gate 41 or the second start winning opening reaches a certain number. Further, the passing gate 41 provides a left-handed notification when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and is provided on the right side of the second start winning opening (or the game area). When a specific number (for example, one) or more of a specific number (for example, one) or more, which is less than a predetermined number, is detected in the special winning opening), the left-handed notification may be performed.

In the feature unit 116IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passing gate 41 or the second start winning opening (or the game area) is displayed. When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening provided on the right side is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
11-12 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 061IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 061IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

When the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data to reduce the relief time. Control is performed to transmit the number 1 designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" in the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the total number of variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS5610B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610B). 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, Or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615B). If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and the relief time reduction count 2 Control is performed to send the designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 061IWS5618B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter does not reach "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B without performing the processing after step 061IWS58B. As a result, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 061IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 061IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step 061IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

If the big hit is not made in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS65B). Step 061IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. As for the small hit type, a plurality of types may be provided so that the opening pattern (that is, the ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening) is different, or only one may be provided. .. When there is only one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Further, when the small hit is not made in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS69B). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is a probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, when the processing of step 061IWS69B is executed, in the case of a probabilistic change state (high probability state), the time reduction deviation determination processing of step 061IWS70B is not performed, and the processing is performed as it is without time reduction. It is determined.

If the probability variation flag is not set, that is, in a low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving is lost, and a random number for determining the time saving. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is decided that the time reduction will be lost with a probability of about 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is decided to use the 6R jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is determined to be the 6R jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "3". If it is decided to use 6R jackpot C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is decided to use 6R jackpot D, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "7". If it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be out of time, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "2". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

When the relief fluctuation flag is set, that is, when the relief fluctuation time is satisfied, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092B) to determine the fluctuation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table C for the second special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established shown in FIG. 11-4 (C) is selected (step 061IWS17093B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the relief variation flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the probability change flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 is used as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 11-4 (A). The second special symbol variation pattern table A for the high probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1712B). When the probability variation flag is not set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or when the high base flag is set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the second special symbol variation pattern table B for times other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) is selected (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in 11-4 is to be used (step 061IWS1717B).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the second special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 061IWS1705B), and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707B).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol is executed. A is selected and the normal fluctuation display of the fluctuation time is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation display of the long variation is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the second special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern table C for the second special symbol is selected, and the variation display dedicated to the relief time reduction is executed.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and it is neither a big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor a small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). ..

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not been transmitted yet, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1123B). Step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 061IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS11256). The CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, if the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit and a high advantage is a big hit. In the case of the type (for example, 6R jackpot C), the variation display of the second special symbol may not be forcibly stopped, and the second special symbol variation process may be terminated as it is. In this case, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126) based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the small hit game. Move to. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 061IWS1120B, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probable variable jackpot, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player plays a game in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening win a game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In order to launch the game ball (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the area, in principle, the game ball wins a prize at the second start winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the second special symbol Although the variation display is not performed, the player intentionally displays the variation of the second special symbol, which has a higher advantage than the variation display of the first special symbol even if the player mistakenly launches the ball (or even if a long variation is executed). (Aiming) The second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display not intended by the player, or the player may intentionally aim at the second start winning opening.

Therefore, in this example, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed. It is configured so that the out-of-order symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol. For example, in a normal state (low probability / low base state), even if a player unintentionally wins a prize in the second start winning opening and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is executed. If the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. In addition, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player intentionally performs a launch operation (right-handed) aiming at winning the second start winning opening, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation time is 10 minutes), the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed from the symbol. It will be stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot symbol from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
11-17 and 11-18 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 061IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag (step 061IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of step 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026B). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). Then, when the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability / high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

When the high base flag is not set (that is, in the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the time saving deviation (step). 061IWS2032B). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2037B).

(External output signal)
FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process of outputting a signal as shown in FIGS. 11-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer is performed. As shown in FIGS. 11-19, in this example, as external output signals, the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal, the jackpot 3 signal, the jackpot 4 signal, the fluctuation stop signal, the security signal, the door opening signal, the prize ball signal, and An out-ball signal is output. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game and the high base state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are externally output at the start of the variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol fixing period. The security signal is a signal that is output externally when an error is detected. The door opening signal is a signal output externally when the door opening is detected. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 prize balls are issued. The out-ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 out-balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of big hits can be measured by one big hit signal, the number of consecutive villas can be measured by one big hit signal and two big hit signals, and the high base control via the time saving loss by three big hit signals. It is possible to measure the number of times, and it is possible to measure the number of high-base control via the relief time reduction by 4 big hit signals.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the high base state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving loss symbol may be derived and displayed because the time saving loss symbol may be shifted to the high base state even when it is derived and displayed. If so, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the symbol determination period. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the state may shift to the high base state. Therefore, when the variation display that shortens the relief time is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal starts at the start of the variation display. Will be done. For example, in the case of shifting to the high base state triggered by the derivation display of the time-saving out-of-time symbol, the signal is output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, and the time-saving is shortened. It may be possible to externally identify that the time saving state has been started when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal is externally output during the jackpot game and during the high probability / high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are at the start of the low probability / high base state (or low probability / high base). It may be output to the outside during the state) so that the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state can be distinguished externally.

In this example, when the relief time is shortened, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened, and the variation occurs at the start of the symbol determination period in response to the end of the variation display. A stop signal is output externally. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to a high base state based on the shortened relief time to the outside at an appropriate timing. Further, when the jackpot 4 signal and the fluctuation stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omission outside. Further, the number of times the relief time is shortened can be specified externally by outputting the big hit 4 signal. In this way, in an external device such as a hall management computer, it is possible to specify the trigger, timing, and number of times controlled to a high base state. Therefore, for example, the relief time reduction arrival rate and the number of relief times in actual operation have been reached. It is possible to analyze the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming store, such as what kind of customer base the player is.

In this example, when the variable display that shortens the relief time is started, the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state). For example, the relief time is shortened. When the variable display that becomes The external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is entered.

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output even during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and a big hit 3 signal may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably discriminate the type of time reduction even in the high base state.

(Transition of game state)
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state transitions in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, whereas the variation display of the second special symbol is long. It is executed with fluctuation. Further, since the base state is low, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened is low. Therefore, in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the left side of the game area and launches the game ball (left). Hit). Therefore, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the starting prize is mainly generated in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when 6R jackpot A occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). ), The low probability / high base state is maintained until the end of the variable display (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, even if the pattern is out of order in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state is obtained when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. (See steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit). It is controlled to a low probability / high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B).

When shifting to the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, while the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the long variation. NS. Further, since the base state is low, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened is low. Therefore, in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball (right). Hit). Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the starting prize is mainly generated in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening, and the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state, a 6R big hit C or a 6R big hit D mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in a high probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high again after the jackpot game ends. / The low base state (first probability variation state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot D occurs in a high probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and has a high probability until the next jackpot occurs. / The high base state (second probability change state) is maintained (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274).

When shifting to the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. NS. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball ( Right-handed). Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the start winning is mainly generated in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a high probability / high base state, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a high probability / high base state, the game shifts to a low probability / high base state after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example). ), The low probability / high base state is maintained until the end of the variable display (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286, S2288).

When shifting to the low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball ( Right-handed). Therefore, in the low probability / high base state, the start winning is mainly generated in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / high base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability / high base state, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Further, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability / high base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state again after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (200 in this example). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the variation display of (times) is completed (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286 and S2288).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the low probability / high base state, when the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, the next big hit does not occur and the number of fluctuations is 800 times. (When) is reached, the time is controlled again to a low probability / high base state of 800 times (see steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5607B to S5608B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the low probability / high base state, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability / high base state. And shift to the low probability / low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the time saving deviation, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, it is low. It ends the probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the jackpot generated in the low base state, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. , Ends the low probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B). In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the jackpot generated in the high base state, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 200 times in total. , Ends the low probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the relief time reduction, the low probability / high when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed 800 times in total. It ends the base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the 6R jackpot C is obtained and the high probability / low base state (first probability change state) is controlled again. However, since it becomes a 6R jackpot D and is controlled to a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), even if a jackpot occurs, it will be in the probability variation state again with a 100% probability. Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), it can be said that the occurrence of at least two more big hits is guaranteed during the probability change state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), if the 6R jackpot B is reached, the probability change state is controlled to the high probability / low base state and the probability change state continues, but if the 6R jackpot A is reached, the probability is low. It shifts to the probability / high base state and the probability change state ends. Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), it can be said that only one big hit is guaranteed to occur during the probability change state (one loop).

In this example, the case where 6R big hits A to D, which are all 6 round big hits, is provided as the big hit type, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, the case where the 6R jackpot A is controlled to the low probability / high base state is shown, but even if the same low probability / high base state is controlled, the number of rounds is shown. 4R jackpot A, which is a 4-round jackpot, or 10R jackpot A, which is a 10-round jackpot, may be provided. Similarly, for example, even when controlled to the same high probability / high base state, a 4R jackpot D for a 4-round jackpot or a 10R jackpot D for a 10-round jackpot may be provided. Often, various aspects are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19, in this example, a low probability / low base state (normal state), a low probability / high base state, and a high probability / high base state (first state). (2 Probability change state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, in this example, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is the second special. It is a state in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the symbol is high (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the first shortened state). In this example, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), which are the first shortened states, the first special symbol is used. The ratio of the fluctuation display having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the first shortened state, the ratio of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least the second shortened state described later. It may be configured to be higher than.

Further, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed with a long variation, while the variation display of the second special symbol is a normal variation. Runs in time. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the ratio of the variation display of the second special symbol to the variation display of the shorter fluctuation time than the variation display of the first special symbol is high ( Hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as a second shortened state). In this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), which is the second shortened state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display of the first special symbol. The ratio is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the second shortened state, the ratio of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least than the first shortened state. It may be configured to be high.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is mainly executed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and in the second shortened state, the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In response to the variation display, the image display device 5 executes the variation display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The variable display of one of the special symbols is not forcibly stopped. In such a configuration, for example, in a normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( When controlled to a high base state), the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped. Here, as control for shortening the relief time (high base state), control for increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol, control for shortening the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening). In addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). When the control related to the special symbol (controlling to the second shortened state with a high ratio) is performed, the fluctuation time is shortened until the variation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, the variation time is 10 minutes) is completed. The variation display of the second special symbol that has been performed (that is, the variation efficiency has been improved) cannot be executed, and the benefit of the relief time reduction cannot be obtained. In such a state, even if the relief time is controlled to be shortened, the progress of the game is significantly delayed and the interest is reduced.

Therefore, in this example, when the relief time reduction is established, as the control of the relief time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control for shortening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is performed (that is, the first special symbol is controlled). Control related to the special symbol, that is, the first shortened state (in this example, the low probability / high base state) is controlled in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has a higher ratio of the fluctuation display having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Is configured to be done. With such a configuration, when the relief time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability / high base state), so even if the fluctuation display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed is continued. , The variation display of the first special symbol whose variation time is shortened (that is, the variation efficiency is improved) can be executed, and the benefit of the relief time reduction can be obtained. In addition, the game can be smoothly advanced when the relief time is controlled to be short, and the interest can be improved.

The fluctuation display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed is continued even after the transition to the relief time reduction (high base state) of the first shortened state, but the fluctuation time is shortened. When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of, the player is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B).

(Example of game state control)
Next, an example of controlling the gaming state will be described. FIG. 11-21 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the first embodiment.

Of FIGS. 11-21, in FIG. 11-21 (A), in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol, which is out of time, is started, and the second special symbol is displayed. An example of controlling the gaming state when the variation display (missing (no time reduction)) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started during the execution of the variation display is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability / low base state) is changed to the time reduction state (low). Control to shift to the probability / high base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the misaligned symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time is shortened (T2 timing), but at this time, the second special symbol being executed is displayed. The out-of-order symbol is not forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established after the relief time reduction is established and the state is shifted to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via the relief time reduction. The time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started before the fluctuation display (T3 timing), but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). ). That is, the time saving state due to the relief time saving, which has a higher number of times of working hours than the time saving loss and has a high advantage, is maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol for which the relief time reduction is established is off (no time reduction), but the variation of the first special symbol for which the relief time reduction is established. Even if the display result of the display is out of time, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the variation display (time reduction loss) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability / high) is changed from the normal state (low probability / low base state). Control to shift to the base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established (T1 timing), but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). That is, the time saving state due to the relief time saving, which has a higher number of times of working hours than the time saving loss and has a high advantage, is maintained.

Of FIGS. 11-21, FIG. 11-21 (B) shows a control example of the gaming state when the time saving state due to the relief time saving ends at the start of the variation display which is the time saving deviation.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction, the update process of the high base number counter is executed at the start of the fluctuation display that is out of the time reduction, and the value is 0. At (t1 timing), control is performed to end the relief time reduction and shift to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol (t2 timing), the time reduction state due to the time reduction deviation from the normal state (low probability / high base state). ) Is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
11-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 100IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 100IWS802, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as stop symbols, which are even-numbered symbols. The combination of (usually a big hit symbol) is determined. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot B to D, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols (probability variation jackpot symbol). ) Is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) of "135" as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. When a plurality of time-saving missed types are provided, a combination of decorative symbols of the missed symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) may be determined according to the time-saving loss type.

However, in this example, even if the time reduction occurs in the high base state, it is practically invalid. Therefore, when the received display result specification command indicates "time reduction" in the high base state. However, it is not a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols), but a combination of decorative symbols in the case of "off". In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, even if the time reduction deviation occurs in the high base state, the special symbol corresponding to the time reduction deviation is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) that reminds us of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) that reminds us of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution setting of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

In this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit, and the advance notice effect is performed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit. It is configured to be executed at a high rate. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). It is configured so that the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is lower when the display result is out of alignment than the period (the period in which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest when the notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) but the big hit is not obtained. Can be done. As for the look-ahead notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief). It may be configured so that the rate of executing the look-ahead notice effect is lower when the display result is out of alignment than the period (the period during which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10).

Further, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), an effect suggesting that the relief time is shortened (for example, a countdown effect) can be executed. In this case, by limiting the execution of the timer effect as the advance notice effect at this time, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counters and prevent them from interfering with each other.

Further, in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the red effect mode (for example, the red effect image is displayed) and the blue effect mode (for example, the blue effect image is displayed). In the case of a big hit, the rate of executing the advance notice effect is higher in the case of the red effect than in the case of the loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). When the display result is out of alignment, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is lower than that in the period when the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10). With such a configuration, the interest when the notice effect is executed by the red effect mode in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is not a big hit. Can be suppressed. As for the look-ahead notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the relief). When the display result is out of alignment, the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect in a mode with high expectation may be lower than the period (the period in which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10).

If multiple types of advance notice effects (and look-ahead advance notice effects) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the types of advance notice effects (and look-ahead advance notice effects) with high jackpot expectations will be saved in a short time. In this example, the execution may be restricted during a predetermined period (in this example, a period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, the execution may be restricted only to the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) of the type in which the jackpot expectation is the fourth stage or higher. Further, for example, when the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) suggesting that the time reduction is out of order is configured to be executable, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining time until the relief time reduction) is enabled. In the period (the number of times is 10 or less), the execution of the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) suggesting that the time is shortened may be restricted.

Further, for example, even if the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a variable display that is a big hit or a time reduction is executed, the execution of the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) is not restricted. May be good.

Further, in the time saving state due to the relief time saving, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect or the advance notice effect may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of, or it may reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of the type of advance notice effect having a high expectation. Is a value larger than the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction, that is, it is a hold memory stored before reaching the fluctuation of the relief time reduction, and the line is controlled after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. It may be configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation. Thereby, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that straddles before and after the control of the relief time reduction is restricted. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect in the production. Even if the number of reserved memories is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, the time is shortened (for example, via a jackpot). In the case of the time saving state or the time saving state via the time saving deviation), it may be possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect for the reserved storage corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 0. It can be judged.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player at an appropriate timing that the relief time is controlled to be controlled to the time reduction state by the time reduction rush effect, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rushing masquerading effect that notifies that the display result will be a big hit after executing an effect having the same mode as the time-saving rushing effect (. Step 100 IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be given a surprise. You can improve your interest.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the time reduction rushing pretending effect is executed using the dedicated fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern #M). Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a full rotation effect (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative symbols are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, is executed. You may do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a surprising and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the big hit as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time is specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is out of order when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, a dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction deviation is used. The fluctuation pattern for deviation as usual may be used, or the fluctuation pattern for specifying the reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be shared between when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached and before it is reached, and the data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the next variable display is started, the image display device 5 switches to the background image according to the time saving state (see steps 061IWS56A and S56B), so that the change in the background image is relieved. It is possible to notify that the time reduction is controlled by the time reduction.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 is used until the relief time is shortened. A process table may be selected that includes a fanning effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, an effect that suggests the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened). Further, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 has a countdown effect (for example, the relief time is shortened) according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Select a process table that includes an effect effect (for example, an effect in which the effect image changes according to the remaining number of changes until the relief time is shortened). You may do it.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component 5) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. FIG. 11-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state in the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 11-23, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-23, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), when the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped and then the variation display that shortens the relief time is started, As shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is started. .. At this time, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, when the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), an image display (for example,) notifying that the blackout state is eliminated and the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is started. The display of "chance mode entry" shown in FIG. 11-23 (C) and the output of the effect sound are executed.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, since the time reduction rush effect is executed when the relief time reduction is started, the notification that the time reduction state is controlled based on the establishment of the relief time reduction is executed at an appropriate timing. It can be done and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when the variation display by the variation pattern (for example, the first variation pattern #M) dedicated to the establishment of the relief time reduction is executed, the time reduction rush effect is executed, so that the relief is performed. It is possible to clearly notify the player that the time reduction state is controlled based on the establishment of the time reduction by the time reduction rush effect.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is appropriately displayed when the time saving rush effect is executed (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started). Right-handed notification can be executed.

When the time saving state including the relief time saving ends and the state shifts to the normal state, the left-handed instruction display instructing the left-handed person may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving rushing effect, notifications that are generally performed during the first ending period, such as warnings for forgetting to remove the prepaid card and warnings for preventing entanglement, may be given, or the logo of the gaming machine maker. May be displayed. In this case, at the time of notification and logo display in the time-saving rushing effect, the notification may be performed in the same manner as the notification in the ending period of the first hit and the logo is displayed, or may be performed in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications and logo displays may not be performed in the time saving rush effect, but may be performed in the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time saving state due to the relief time saving.

Further, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, when the time reduction rushing appearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), it is common with the time reduction rushing effect. In the aspect, a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is started, and the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 that instructs right-handed is displayed. NS. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), the blackout state is eliminated and the effect of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol (for example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is executed. After that, it shifts to the big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

In addition, a bonus game is also executed in which the configuration of the feature unit 116IW is controlled to a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the bonus during a small hit game. When applied to a game machine that is configured to be possible, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the relief time is a small hit, after executing the time saving rushing pretending effect, it is notified that it will be a small hit. May be good.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of the modification 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established, the time reduction rush effect is configured to notify that the control of the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is started, but the start of the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. Since the control of the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is sometimes started, the time reduction rush effect may be executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special symbol normal processing and the second special symbol normal processing, when the value of the relief time reduction counter after updating is "1", immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is established. If the variation flag immediately before relief is set to indicate that it is a variation display and the variation flag immediately before relief is set in the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process, immediately before the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is established. It is determined to be a dedicated variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to the first variation pattern # M and the first variation pattern # N) used only for the variation display of. Then, in the variable display start setting process, when the remaining number of times of the relief time reduction is 1, the process table including the time reduction rush effect is selected. By such a process, it is possible to execute the time saving rush effect in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established.

FIG. 11-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state in the modified example 1-3 of the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 11-24, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modification 1-3 shown in FIGS. 11-24, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), after the variation display two times before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. It will be started. However, at this point in time, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is not displayed because the time saving state has not been entered.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (C), an image display (for example, for example) notifying that the blackout state is eliminated and the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is started. The display of "chance mode entry" shown in FIG. 11-24 (C) and the output of the effect sound are executed. Even at this point, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is not displayed because the time saving state has not been entered.

After that, when the variation display for reducing the relief time is started, the control of the time reduction state is started, so that the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-24 (D).

In the configuration of the modification 1-3 shown in FIGS. 11-24, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the relief time reduction is started, so that the player prepares for the right-handed operation in preparation for the start of the relief time reduction. Can be done. Also in this respect, it is possible to notify at an appropriate timing that the relief time is controlled based on the establishment of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, when the time reduction rush effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern used in other variation displays in the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established (that is, only when the relief time reduction is established). The variation display is performed using the variation pattern). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. For the variation display (variation display immediately before the variation display where the relief time reduction is established) that executes the time reduction rush effect, the variation pattern used in other variation displays (that is, the variation pattern that is not exclusively for the relief time reduction establishment) is used. The variable display may be executed.

Further, in the configuration of the modification 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the relief time reduction is started, but the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started to display the variation in which the relief time reduction is established. Since it is displayed at the time (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started), the right-handed notification can be appropriately executed.

In the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, when the display result is a big hit, it may be possible to execute the time reduction rushing pretending effect. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

Further, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, or when the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, the configuration that enables the time reduction rush effect and the time reduction rush appearance effect can be executed. , Not limited to the gaming machine having the configuration shown in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, for example, a high probability / low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits frequently occur as shown in the second embodiment. It can also be applied to gaming machines having other configurations, such as gaming machines provided with.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. In this embodiment, the detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the portion different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

The gaming state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state). KT state: Normal state), low probability and 1st KT state (low probability / 1st KT state), high probability and 1st KT state (high probability / 1st KT state) There are cases where it is controlled to a high probability and a case where it is controlled to a second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and even if small hits occur. There are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In the second embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than the big hit and the time reduction, the ratio of the small hit is higher than that of the small hit (or the loss (no time reduction)). ). That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is either a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction loss, and the display result is not a loss (no time reduction) (or a small hit rather than a loss (no time reduction)). The ratio is high). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit is short, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is made to win a game ball. It is structured so that it is extremely difficult (or virtually impossible to win).

(Transition of gaming state in the second embodiment)
The transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state transitions in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. First, in this feature unit 116IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, whereas the second special symbol is executed. Since the fluctuation display of is executed with a long fluctuation, the player performs a firing operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) after the end of the jackpot game. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed.

Further, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time saving state via the time saving loss and the relief time saving (in this example, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state)). ) Is controlled. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-1, even if the pattern is out of order in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / low probability / when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit). It is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, corresponding to a portion that executes the process of steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the first special symbol is executed. The relief time reduction counter can be updated at the timing at which the variation display of the second special symbol is started and the timing at which the variation display of the second special symbol is started (for example, in steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes processing).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in the second embodiment of this feature portion 116IW, the first special While the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with a long fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, so that the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball. Do (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probable big hit, a 6R probable big hit, or a 2R probable big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total, so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed without the next big hit after the 6R normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is reached, as shown in FIG. 12-1. It shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment as well as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened in the low probability / high base state (after the RAM clear processing or after the RAM clear processing). After the big hit game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the occurrence of the next big hit), it is controlled again to the low probability / high base state (first KT state) of 800 times of time reduction (for example). Corresponds to the portion that executes the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). The number of time reductions in the second embodiment is the remaining number of totals of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the low probability / high base state (first KT state). Corresponds to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment as well as in the first embodiment, in the low probability / high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. When the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability / high base state is terminated and the transition is made to the low probability / low base state (normal state).

For example, when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is terminated and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed (for example, steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled via the relief time reduction, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 800 times in total. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is terminated and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed (for example, steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the portion that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it is configured to be controlled to a low probability / high base state with a time reduction of 50 times, but the first embodiment Similarly, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game may be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. For example, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a normal state (low base state), it is controlled to a low probability / high base state with 100 time reductions, and if a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a high base state, it is controlled. , The time reduction may be controlled to a low probability / high base state of 200 times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is a big hit, it is assumed that the big hit has occurred in the high base state, and the low probability that the number of time reductions is 200 times after the end of the big hit game. / It may be controlled to a high base state (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment is performed, and the relief time reduction counters of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B are updated. Corresponds to the part to be executed after the processing and the processing for setting the high base flag). With such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 2R Since the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot is 50%, once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state.

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

Further, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 12-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variation time. On the other hand, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the ratio of the variation display of the first special symbol to the variation display of the shorter fluctuation time than the variation display of the second special symbol is high. This is the first shortened state. In the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state) in which the first shortened state is obtained, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The display ratio may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than the second shortened state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) and the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT). In the state) and the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed with a long fluctuation, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed with a normal fluctuation time. Will be done. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / low base state (second KT). The state) is the second shortened state in which the ratio of the variation display of the second special symbol to the variation display of the shorter variation time than the variation display of the first special symbol is high. In the second embodiment, the second shortened state is a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and a high probability /. In the low base state (second KT state), the ratio of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is configured to be, for example, 100%. It may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state, the relief time reduction control includes a control for increasing the probability of hitting a normal figure, a control for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and a variable winning ball device 6B (second). In addition to the control related to the normal symbol, which is to lengthen the opening time of the start winning opening), the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is larger than the variation display of the first special symbol). The control related to the special symbol is performed, that is, the control is performed in the second shortened state in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation time is high). That is, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to a portion for executing the process of steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol Even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display, the variation display of one of the special symbols is not forcibly stopped. In such a configuration, for example, in a normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( When controlled to a high base state), the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped, and the variation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, the variation time is 10 minutes). It is conceivable that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time has been shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency has been improved) cannot be executed until the end of the procedure, and the benefit of the shortened relief time cannot be obtained. Then, in such a state, even if the relief time is controlled to be shortened, the progress of the game is significantly delayed and the interest is reduced.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than the big hit and the time reduction, it becomes a small hit (or a small hit rather than the loss (no time reduction)). The ratio is high). That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is either a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction loss, and the display result is not a loss (no time reduction) (or a small hit rather than a loss (no time reduction)). The ratio is high). Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display, the missed symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the special symbols (for example, step 061IWS1126A in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes the processing of S1129A, S1126B, S1129B).

By combining these configurations, in the second embodiment, when the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display (long variation) of the second special symbol. As the control of the relief time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is larger than the variation display of the first special symbol. The control related to the special symbol is performed, that is, the second shortened state (in this example, the control is performed to the low probability / high base state (first KT state)) in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation time is high. At this time, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is a small hit unless it is a big hit or a time reduction deviation. Then, based on the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display (long variation) of the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in which the fluctuation time is shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency is improved) without waiting for the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation (for example, 10 minutes) to expire. You can benefit from shorter relief times. In addition, the game can be smoothly advanced when the relief time is controlled to be short, and the interest can be improved.

(First special symbol normal processing in variant 2)
12-2 to 12-5 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal processing in the second modification.

In the second modification, the processing of steps 061IWS50A to S56A is the same as those processing shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, in the second modification, since the process of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, the relief time reduction counter update process is executed even in the probabilistic change state (high probability state). Will be done. That is, not only in the non-probability state (low probability state), but also in the probability change state (high probability state), when the fluctuation display is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened uniformly decreases. It is configured in. Therefore, in the second modification, the probability variation flag may be set when the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction becomes “0”.

If the probability change flag is set when the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0" (Y in step 061IWS56061A), that is, if the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state, step 061IWS5701A is set. Transition.

Further, in the second modification, "100" is set in the high base count counter after the probability variation jackpot, and the high base count counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A every time the fluctuation display is executed. Here, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes "0", the probability change flag is set, that is, the probability change even if the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit reaches 100 fluctuations. If it has not fallen, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and the high base state are maintained until the probabilistic fall occurs.

On the other hand, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit, the probability change falls with less than 100 fluctuations and the probability change. If only the flag is reset (when the processing of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described later is executed), or if it is controlled to the low probability / high base state after the normal big hit, the high base flag is reset (step). 061IWS5620A). By the processing of step 061IWS56191A, in the modified example 2, in the probabilistic state after the big hit game by the probabilistic big hit, if the probabilistic change falls with less than 100 fluctuations, the probabilistic change state (high probability state) ends immediately, but the time saving state. (High base state) continues until 100 fluctuations are reached.

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment. In the second modification, when step 061IWS5621A is completed, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief time reduction flag indicating that the relief time reduction has been established in the probabilistic state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

When the probability change flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 has a fall determination random number (a random number for jackpot determination or a random number for jackpot type determination) stored in the random number buffer area. A random number dedicated to the fall determination, which is different, is read out, and a fall lottery process is performed based on the random number for the fall determination (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the fall determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the probability variation fall lottery. I do. When the game control microcomputer 100 matches the fall determination value, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the probability change state is terminated. In the second modification, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is determined that the probability change state is terminated with a probability of, for example, 1/800.

If the probable change does not fall (does not end the probable change state) (N at 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. When it is determined to end the probabilistic state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter capable of counting the number of fluctuations in the probability change state after the big hit game and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game.

When the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the fan reach A flag indicating that the fan reach A is executed. Set (step 061IWS5713A). After that, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

By the process of step 061IWS5711A, in the modification 2, if the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit is less than 100 fluctuations and the probability change falls, only the probability change flag is reset. Further, by the process of step 061IWS5713A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change state ends, the fan reach A for notifying that the probable change fall is executed is executed. NS.

If it is not less than 100 fluctuations after the big hit game (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief time reduction flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, The probabilistic change flag and the high base flag are reset, and the probabilistic change state and the time saving state are ended (step 061IWS5712A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fan reach A flag indicating that the fan reach A is executed (061IWS5713A).

In this example, it is configured to execute the same fan reach A in the case where the probabilistic fall occurs after 100 fluctuations after the probabilistic jackpot game and the case where the probabilistic fall occurs after 100 fluctuations. For example, in the case of a probabilistic fall with less than 100 fluctuations after the probabilistic big hit game, the probabilistic fall may be notified and then the time saving state may be notified. It is possible to prevent the player from being greatly discouraged due to a probable fall in a short period of time.

When the relief time reduction flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief time reduction flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets "800" in the high base count counter (step 061IWS5708A). .. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). After that, the fan reach B flag indicating that the fan reach B is executed is set (061IWS5710A), and the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the relief time reduction is established after the probable change fall, it is controlled from the time when the relief time reduction is established to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the relief time reduction, and if the relief time reduction is established before the probability change fall, the probability change fall occurs. If the configuration is controlled to the normal state from a certain point in time, the benefits that can be received depending on the timing of establishment of the relief time reduction will differ greatly, and there is a risk that the relief will be insufficient. Therefore, in the second modification, if the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state by the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A, the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction when the probability change falls. There is. Therefore, the count of 800 times of time reduction due to the relief time reduction is started not when the relief time reduction is established, but after the probable change falls and the time reduction state is entered. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately receive relief by shortening the relief time.

Further, by the process of step 061IWS5707A, the relief time reduction flag is reset when the relief time reduction flag is controlled to the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction when the probable change falls. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the relief time reduction has been established in the probable change state.

Information indicating the state of the relief time reduction flag is stored in, for example, the RAM 102. Then, when the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time saving flag and the probability change flag are reset. That is, if the RAM clear process is executed when the rescue time reduction is established in the probability change state, the game state becomes the normal state (low probability / low base state) in which the relief time reduction flag is not set. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the relief time reduction has been established in the probable change state.

In the RAM clear processing, the probability change flag is reset, but the relief time reduction flag is maintained, and the probability change flag is not set at the start of fluctuation, but the relief time reduction flag is set. , The relief time may be controlled to a short time (low probability / high base state). That is, if the RAM clear process is executed when the relief time reduction is established and the RAM clear processing is executed, the game state becomes the normal state (low probability / low base state), but when the variation display is started, the relief time is reduced. It may be controlled.

Further, by the processing of step 061IWS5710A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change fall occurs and the probable change state ends, the probable change fall is once notified, and then the relief time is shortened. A fan reach B is executed to notify that the time is controlled to a short time state (high base state).

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in the modification 2, when the jackpot is determined by the execution of the jackpot determination module, the rescue time reduction flag is reset if the rescue time reduction flag is set (step 061IWS631A). By the process of step 061IWS631A, the information that the relief time reduction is established in the probable change state can be appropriately managed. In addition, it is possible to prevent excessive relief from being performed.

Further, in the second modification, when the jackpot is determined by the execution of the jackpot determination module and the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fan reach C. Set the fan reach C flag to indicate execution (061IWS633A).

By the processing of steps 061IWS632A to S633A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change fall and the probable change state ends, the fan reach C for notifying that the big hit is executed is executed. ..

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the modification 2, it is determined whether or not any of the fan reach A to C is set, and if it is set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding fan reach is determined. do. Other processes are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

In the second modification, in the second special symbol normal process and the second variation pattern setting process, the same processes as those of the first special symbol normal process and the first variation pattern setting process are executed. Therefore, in the second modification, it is possible to execute the probabilistic fall lottery and the fan reach in both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the first fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process, when any of the fanning reach A to C is set and the number of fluctuations in the probable change state after the big hit game exceeds 100 fluctuations, the fanning is performed. You may want to perform reach. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-6, until the number of fluctuations in the probabilistic state after the big hit game reaches 100 fluctuations, a common effect (for example, a common effect) regardless of whether or not the probabilistic fall has occurred. The background image is displayed) may be executed. That is, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the fall has occurred up to the 100th fluctuation. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the probability change fall determination effect for notifying whether the probability change has occurred or the probability change is continued at the 100th fluctuation may be executed.

For example, when the probabilistic fall has already occurred, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern A for notifying that the probabilistic fall has occurred is executed. Further, when the probabilistic fall has already occurred but the relief time is controlled, the probabilistic change of the mode B of notifying that the relief time is controlled after notifying that the probabilistic fall has occurred. The fall determination effect is executed.
Further, in the case of a big hit at the 100th variation, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern C for notifying that the big hit is obtained is executed. Further, when the probabilistic state is continued, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern D for notifying that the probabilistic state is continuing is executed.

With the configuration as shown in FIG. 12-6, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player in the period after the 100th change in the probable change state and improve the interest.

In the second modification, when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state, it is configured to notify that the relief time is shortened after being notified that the probability change fall has occurred. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, when the relief time is shortened in the probable change state, it may not be notified at all even if the probable change falls. That is, even if the probable change falls, the notification to that effect is not given or the effect does not change, and the probable change may occur without the player noticing.

(Production example in variant 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning reach in the modification 2 will be described. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning Lee in the modification 2. In addition, in FIG. 12-7, the fanning reach A is in the order of (1), (2), and (3-1), and the fanning reach B is in the order of (1), (2), (3-2), and (4). The effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3-3).

In the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned, the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a are in the reach state as shown in FIG. 12-7 (2). The fan reach to perform the battle is started.

Then, in the case of the fan reach A, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-1), the probabilistic fall image 014IW004a is displayed, which informs that the ally character 014IW002 is defeated in the battle and becomes a probable fall. After that, it shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state).

In the case of fanned reach B, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-2), the probabilistic fall image 014IW004a that informs that the ally character 014IW002 is defeated in the battle and becomes a probable fall is temporarily displayed. As shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), the character display of "chance mode entry" and the relief time reduction image 014IW004c for notifying that the relief time is controlled are displayed. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), and for example, the time saving rush effect shown in FIG. 11-23 may be executed. After that, it shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state).

In the case of fanning reach C, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-3), a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify that the ally character 014IW002 wins the battle and becomes a jackpot. After that, it shifts to the big hit game state.

In the second modification, when the relief time reduction is established in the probable change state, the relief time reduction establishment notification is executed to notify that fact. For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (1) and 12-8, the image display device 5 has a "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that when the relief time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, the rescue time is controlled to the chance mode (relief time reduction). It is displayed in a part of. In the relief time reduction notification as shown in FIG. 12-8, for example, when it is determined that the relief time reduction has been established on the main board 11 side, an effect control command indicating that effect is transmitted to the effect control board 12. When the effect control command is received on the effect control board 12, it can be realized by controlling the display of the "chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the probabilistic state, which can give the player a sense of security and improve the interest.

Note that the relief time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 12-8 is performed not only in the probabilistic state but also when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state or when the relief time reduction is controlled to the time reduction state (or). It may be done by lottery).

(Example of controlling the gaming state in Modification 2)
Next, a control example of the gaming state in the second modification will be described. FIG. 12-9 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), if the relief time reduction is not established in the probability change state by the time of the probability change fall, the probability change flag and the high base flag are reached when the probability change fall occurs (T1 timing). Is reset, and the gaming state shifts from the high probability / high base state to the low probability / low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state until the probability change falls, for example, the relief time reduction is established at the t1 timing in FIG. 12-9 (B). If so, the relief time reduction flag is set at the t1 timing. Then, when the probability change falls (t2 timing), the probability change flag and the relief time reduction flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. That is, the gaming state shifts from the high probability / high base state to the low probability / high base state.

The configuration shown in the second modification is applicable to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a fall lottery is executed in a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), and if a winner is won, a normal state (low probability / low base) is executed. It may be made to shift to the state). Further, when applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery is executed when the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is reached, and if the player wins, the normal state (low probability / low). You may move to the base state).

It should be noted that both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Not limited to such a configuration, a configuration in which the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the order of starting winning, or one of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The configuration shown in the modification 2 can also be applied to the configuration.

Further, the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above have been shown to be applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variation display result, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a character game that controls a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a specific area (V prize area) in the character during a small hit game. A configuration for controlling the feature portion 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied.

Further, in the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear processing is executed or the jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter at random may be set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, information that can specify the number of occurrences of the relief time reduction may be retained. For example, the high base flag set in the second relief time reduction that has been transferred again may be different from the high base flag set in the first relief time reduction.

In the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, different effects are executed depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief (for example, different background display). Is displayed, or it is determined to have a different fluctuation pattern (variation time)).

Further, in the feature unit 116IW and each modification shown above, in controlling the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the probabilistic control is performed until the next big hit occurs (or until the probable change falls). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in controlling the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, the so-called ST in which the upper limit number of times of the special figure game in which the probability change control is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol) is set is set. A configuration for controlling the feature unit 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied to the machine.

Specifically, as a so-called ST machine, the jackpot probability is about 1/100, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation state is controlled at a rate of 100%, and the probability variation control is performed. , 8 times) will be described in the case of applying the configuration for controlling the feature unit 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification to the gaming machine having the configuration in which (8 times) is set. In the gaming machine of the ST machine, a plurality of types of jackpots (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, etc.) are provided as display results of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. When a big hit occurs, it is assumed that the big hit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) has the highest degree of advantage at a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%). In addition, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the probability change control is performed 8 times as the upper limit of the special figure game. Shall be set. Then, if a big hit does not occur in the eight special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed, the upper limit number of times in the special figure game in which the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is controlled and the high base control is performed is set. It is assumed that 249 times are set. That is, after the end of the big hit game state, if the next big hit does not occur, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then the time reduction state with 249 time reductions (low probability). / High base state) shall be controlled.

Even if the above-mentioned ST machine game machine finishes the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) in the non-probability state (low probability state) after the power is turned on to the game machine or after the big hit occurs, the next big hit is received. If it does not occur, it is possible to apply a configuration controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state) assuming that the relief time saving is established.

When such a configuration is applied, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is first controlled to the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) with the probability variation number of 8 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a big hit. Then, since it is in the probability change state (high probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated.

When the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes is completed without a big hit, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reductions is controlled. At this time, since it is a non-probability change state (low probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is set every time the special figure game (that is, the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol) is executed. Updated (eg, subtracted by 1).

When the time saving state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time saving is completed without the big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state). However, at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special symbol game (variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. It will be. Here, if there is a hold memory stored in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time reduction, a special figure game (variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) based on the hold memory. By executing the variable display), the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the transition to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to improve the interest.

When the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) ends and the relief time reduction is once controlled to the low base state (normal state), the background image corresponding to the high base state is continuously displayed. You may try to do it. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages stored at the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time saving is established. If it is determined that the image is large, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, the normal state controlled after the end of the time reduction state of 249 times of time reduction and before the relief time reduction is established (that is, the reserved memory stored in the time reduction state for a short period of time (for example, the reserved memory stored in the time reduction state) is digested. The normal state) in which the relief time is shortened during the period until it is done) is also called a special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

Further, for example, when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is controlled by the relief time saving. Alternatively, a mode transition effect indicating that the control of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) by the relief time saving may be started may be executed. In this case, after the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the fluctuation display in the low base state (normal state) before the occurrence of the relief time reduction (for example, the fluctuation display immediately after the end of the time reduction state, or the relief time reduction) The mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display immediately before the establishment of the above, or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display in which the relief time is shortened.

Further, for example, in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (for example, a 5R probability variation jackpot) is obtained among a plurality of types of jackpots, the next jackpot will be awarded after the jackpot gaming state ends. If it does not occur, it is controlled to a probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then to a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 32 time reductions. That is, in the case of a big hit with a low degree of advantage, even if the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends, it is in a short period (for example, in the time saving state). It is assumed that the relief time reduction is not established within the period until the stored reserved memory is digested.

In this case, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 32 (that is, the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). Is to execute left-handed notification (for example, display of left-handed instruction display instructing left-handed in the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability / low base state) after the end of the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. Then, when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), the same left-handed notification may not be executed after the end of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state. That is, the left-handed notification (for example, the display of the left-handed instruction display instructing the left-handed on the image display device 5) may not be executed at the time of transition to the special normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player has once transitioned to the low base state (normal state) when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time after the end of the time reduction state. You can improve your interest.

In addition, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 32 (that is, the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). And when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), for example, a background specification command, a big hit start specification command, a big hit end specification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 side. By different types of effect control commands, the effect control board 12 distinguishes between those time reduction states, and the effect control matching each time reduction state (for example, displaying the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc.) , BGM output, etc.) may be performed. The method of distinguishing the time reduction state on the effect control board 12 side is not limited to such a method, and for example, the jackpot type and the number of time reductions after the jackpot game may be specified by the received display result designation command.

When the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), a left-handed notification (for example, an image display device) is given on the effect control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed. Even if the configuration is such that the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handedness is not executed in 5, the main board 11 side once shifts to the normal state (that is, left-handed from the right-handed state). The process corresponding to the switching to the state to be performed (for example, turning off the right-handed display 26, stopping the output of the right-handed test signal output as a test signal, changing the firing position designation signal, etc.) is executed. During the transition to the normal state (that is, the special normal state), the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, 2 jackpot signals) may be temporarily stopped on the main board 11 side. , The external output may be continued. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, 2 jackpot signals), the output of the launch position designation signal output as the test signal is changed (or the output of the right-handed test signal is stopped). ) May be done.

Further, for example, the effect to be executed may be different between the time reduction state (or the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 249 times) and the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state). For example, an effect that suggests that the relief time reduction is established or the number of times until the relief time is established (for example, a countdown effect) can be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), while the remaining time reduction is achieved. It may not be executed in the time saving state where the number of times is indicated (or the time saving state where the number of times of time saving is 249 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the above effects can be obtained is not limited to the configuration of the time reduction number of the time reduction state controlled after the probability change state used in the above description and the configuration of the fluctuation number (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established. .. For example, the number of fluctuations in which the relief time reduction is established (non-probability change state) is larger than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, and the start winning opening that makes it easier to enter in the time reduction state (for example, the second start). It may be configured to be smaller than (or the same as) the sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry into the winning opening). With such a configuration, after the end of the big hit game state, even if it shifts to the low base state (normal state) through the probabilistic change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state). , Since the relief time can be established without generating a new start prize in the low base state (normal state), the player is aware that the rescue time has changed to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time is established. It is possible to prevent it from being caused, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) than the time reduction number in the time reduction state, the time reduction is controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state). Before the state (low probability / high base state) ends, the relief time reduction can be established (that is, the reduction time can be updated by the establishment of the relief time reduction).

In the above-mentioned ST machine, the probability changes after the end of the big hit gaming state, depending on whether a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol or a big hit due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It seems that the number of time reductions controlled through the state (high probability / high base state) is different (or the ratio of the number of advantageous time reductions among multiple types of time reductions is different). It may be configured as. In this case, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled via a probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. ) Is 32 times (or 32 times out of 249 times is high), and when a big hit occurs due to the variation display of the second special symbol, after the end of the big hit game state , The number of time reductions controlled through the probabilistic state (high probability / high base state) is 249 times (or the number of time reductions is 32 times and 249 times out of 249 times). The ratio is high).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs (or the number of rounds of a plurality of types) depending on whether the jackpot due to the variable display of the first special symbol occurs or the jackpot due to the variable display of the second special symbol occurs. It may be configured so that the ratio of the number of advantageous rounds is different). For example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is 5 rounds (or 5 rounds, and the ratio of 5 rounds out of 10 rounds is high), and the 2nd special symbol When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state may be 10 rounds (or 5 rounds, or 10 out of 10 rounds is high). With such a configuration, the advantage can be different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, which improves the interest. Can be made to.

Further, also in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving are also performed. ) And, different variation pattern tables may be used. For example, in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state). It is also possible to use a variation pattern table in which the rate determined by the variation pattern is high (and, for example, the rate determined by the variation pattern in which reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of deviation is low). .. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of deviation in reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is low, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 116IW and the gaming machine of each modified example shown above, for example, as a jackpot type, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is continued until the next jackpot occurs. Probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot A controlled by a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 100 time reductions, and non-probability control by a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reductions. Probability change jackpot B is provided, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 fluctuation displays are completed in the non-probability change state after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the jackpot occurs, the relief time is shortened. It may be configured to do so. That is, it is controlled to the time reduction state until just before the relief time reduction is established (specifically, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning opening (for example, the second start winning opening) that is easy to enter in the time reduction state). A jackpot type may be provided in which the sum with the upper limit storage number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry is larger (or the same) than the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, a gaming state in which the time saving state after the big hit game is shifted to the time saving state by the relief time saving (actually, the normal state (that is, the special normal state) is temporarily controlled before the relief time saving is established). The transition will be performed, and the interest can be improved.

As described above, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 116-1-1) to (means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, a big hit) is executed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display of the symbol), and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) can be updated. Means (eg, the portion where the game control computer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B) and a special state (eg, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (eg, low probability / low base state). ) Is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification. Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed. At that time, a notification effect execution means (for example, a time-saving rush effect shown in FIGS. 11-23) that notifies that the special state is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition can be executed. A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS806B) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-1-2) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, a big hit) is executed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display of the symbol), and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) can be updated. Means (eg, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B) and a special state (eg, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). ) Is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification. Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display is being executed, a notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect shown in FIGS. 11-24) that notifies that the special state is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition can be executed. Further provided with means of execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-2) In the means 116-1-1, a special variable display pattern (for example, a first fluctuation pattern # M (relief time shortening rush loss) and a second fluctuation pattern # L (relief time reduction rush loss)) is included. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) is provided, and special conditions are satisfied for the variable display pattern determining means. The special variable display pattern can be determined (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B), and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special conditions are satisfied. The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B, and the effect control. (Part where the computer 120 executes steps 108IWS805 and S806B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition by the notification effect.

(Means 116-3) In means 116-1-2, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B). The variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, so that the variable display pattern can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the configuration of the modification shown in FIGS. 11-24). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-3, the special state control means becomes an advantageous state in either a special state or a non-special state (for example, a low base state). Depending on whether it is controlled, it is possible to control to a special state having different advantages after the end of the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. During the normal state. When a 6R jackpot A occurs in the (low base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and the 6R jackpot is controlled during the time saving state (high base state). When A occurs and is controlled to a time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to a time saving state of 200 times of time saving (see FIG. 11-1), and a variable display result of variable display in which a special condition is satisfied. If is a specific display result, the advantage of the special state to be controlled after the end of the advantageous state is determined, assuming that the special state is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines step 061IWS59A, The portion where the jackpot determination module of S59B is executed after the relief time reduction counter update process and the high base flag setting process of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 116-5) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-4, the game medium is used for the first path (for example, the path by left-handed) and the second path (for example, the path by right-handed). A launch promotion notification means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched toward either the game area that can be separated and the first path or the second path. The right-handed instruction display 100IW108 and the part displaying the left-handed instruction display) are provided, and the launch promotion notification means should launch the game medium toward the second path when the notification effect is executed. The launch promotion notification can be executed (for example, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when the time saving rush effect is executed. See FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-23 (C)). According to such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be appropriately executed.

(Means 116-6) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-5, the special condition is controlled based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied in response to the start of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to output a signal that can specify that (for example, 4 jackpot signals), and output a signal that can specify that the variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display (for example, a variable stop signal). It is equipped with a possible signal output means (see, for example, FIGS. 11-19). According to such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition to the outside at an appropriate timing.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 117-1) to (means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that For example, in a special state (for example, a high base state) in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the step 061IWS5603A, S5603B) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, the low probability / low base state). Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal figure, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening)). The means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are performed in parallel. (For example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B) and the variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. The low probability in the first embodiment that the first shortened state (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol) having a high rate of variable display of the period. / Low base state (normal state), low probability / high base state, and high probability / high base state (second probability variation state). See FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19) and the second. The second shortened state (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is larger than the variable display of the first special symbol) in which the variable display of the identification information is shorter than the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display period is high. High probability / low base state (first probability variation state) in the first embodiment, which is executed with a short fluctuation time. See FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19). The updating means includes a shortened state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206). Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). ), In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". ), It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display executing means is the first. While the variable display of one of the 1 identification information and the 2nd identification information is being executed, the identification information of the other is variable based on the fact that a special condition is satisfied by the execution of the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the display is not derived and displayed (for example, see FIG. 11-21 (A)), and the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information. Based on this, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B). The shortened state control means can be controlled to the first shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 061IWS5607A, The part that executes S5607B. When the relief time reduction is established, the variation display of the first special symbol shifts to a low probability / high base state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the second special symbol. See Figure 11-20). According to such a configuration, since the first shortened state is controlled after the special condition is satisfied, the game can be smoothly advanced and the interest can be improved.

(Means 117-2) In the means 117-1, the variable display executing means displays a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps. 061IWS2032A, S2032B execution part), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, for game control). The part where the microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B (see FIG. 11-21 (A)), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result. The degree is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the condition that the special condition is satisfied (for example, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving number is 800 times, whereas in the time saving state via the time saving time saving, the time saving state is 800 times. The number of time reductions is 100 times. See FIG. 11-1). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 117-3) In the means 117-1 or the means 117-2, the special state control means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and the special display result is obtained. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the special state based on the above (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. The special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B). According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 117-4) In any one of the means 117-1 to the means 117-3, the variable display executing means has a specific display result and a predetermined display result as display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. A special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and the other identification information is being executed during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B). , The part that executes S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 117-5) In any of the means 117-1 to the means 117-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. The numerical information can be updated with (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 118-1) to (means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that For example, in the first embodiment, the portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed) and the special state (for example, in the high base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal figure, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening)). The means (for example, the portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 in the first embodiment) and the variable display of the first identification information are shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. In the second embodiment, in which the first shortened state (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol) in which the ratio of the variable display of the variable display period is high is high. Low probability / low base state (normal state). See Fig. 12-1) and the second, where the variable display of the second identification information is a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information. The low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) in the second embodiment in which the shortened state (for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). ), High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and high probability / low base state (second KT state). See FIG. 12-1). (Corresponding to a portion for executing steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206) in the embodiment of the above, and the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion where steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment), and the special state control means is updated. Numerical information updated by means However, when the special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state is set. It is controllable (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. As a display result, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result can be derived and displayed, and during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the identification information can be displayed. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information (for example). , Step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1129B), the shortened state control means is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition, the second shortened state. (For example, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) in the second embodiment). According to such a configuration, while the variable display of one of the identification information is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Since the display result is derived and displayed, and is controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is satisfied, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be improved.

(Means 118-2) In the means 118-1, the variable display executing means has a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the step in the first embodiment). When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (corresponding to the part where 061IWS2032A and S2032B are executed), the special state can be controlled based on the condition of the special condition (for example,). Steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result is It is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is 800 times, whereas the time reduction state via the time reduction is 100 times. Times. See Figure 12-1). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 118-3) In the means 118-1 or the means 118-2, the special state control means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and the special display result is obtained. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the special state based on the above (for example, corresponding to the portion where steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B are executed in the first embodiment), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. However, the special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, it corresponds to the portion where steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B are executed in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 118-4) In any one of the means 118-1 to the means 118-3, the variable display executing means has a specific display result and a predetermined display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. A special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and the other identification information is being executed during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the identification information (for example, steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B in the first embodiment). , Corresponds to the part that executes S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 118-5) In any of the means 118-1 to the means 118-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, it corresponds to the portion where steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 119-1) to (means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that For example, in the first embodiment, a portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). A controllable special state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 in the first embodiment) and a specific state that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the normal state. A specific state control means that can be controlled (for example, a high-probability state) (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment) and an end that determines to end the specific state in the specific state by lottery. Execution of the normal state control means (for example, step 061IWS5704A, S5712A in the modification 2) that can be controlled to the normal state based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the modification 2) and the end determination means. And the notification effect that can notify whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state (for example, the fanning reach A to C shown in FIGS. 12-7). (For example, a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A, the processing of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the states of the fanning reach flags A to C, and the like in the modification 2). , The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in the first embodiment, step 061IWS5603A, In the special state control means (the part that executes S5603B), the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value (for example, a relief time reduction counter) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By setting the value to "0"), it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, the specific state is terminated by the end determination means after the special condition is satisfied. A portion that is controllable to a special state after it has been determined (eg, performing steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A-S5709A in variant 2). (See FIG. 12-9), the notification effect execution means is controlled to the special state when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state (for example, FIGS. 12-7 (3-2), (4). It can be notified by the fan reach B) shown in. According to such a configuration, even when the specific state ends, it is notified by the notification effect that the special state is controlled based on the fulfillment of the special condition, so that the player feels at ease. It can be given and the interest can be improved.

(Means 119-2) In the means 119-1, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing special information (for example, a relief time reduction flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition is satisfied. ), And the special information is erased based on being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the portion where step 061IWS631A is executed in the second modification). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-3) In means 119-1 or means 119-2, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage indicating that the special condition is satisfied (for example, a relief time saving flag) can be stored. The means (eg, RAM 102) is provided, and the special information is erased based on being controlled to the special state after the specific state ends (for example, the portion where step 061IWS5707A is executed in the second modification). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-4) In means 119-1 to means 119-3, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition can be stored. A means (for example, RAM 102) is provided, and the specific state control means can end the control of the specific state by executing the initialization process (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8). , The special information is deleted by executing the initialization process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-5) From means 119-1 to means 119-4, a special condition establishment notification effect for notifying that a special condition is satisfied in a specific state (for example, a chance mode as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2)). A special condition establishment notification effect executing means capable of executing (a "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that the control is controlled by (relief time reduction) is displayed on a part of the image display device 5) is provided. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the special state is controlled after the end of the specific state, which can give the player a sense of security and improve the interest.

(Means 119-6) In means 119-1 to 119-5, when the special state control means finishes the specific state by the time the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the specific state. In addition, it is possible to control the special state until the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, the portion where steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A are executed in the modification 2), and the notification effect executing means sets the predetermined number of times. When the variable display is executed beyond that, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is displayed (for example, the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in the second modification). Or, the part where the process of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the states of the fan reach flags A to C is controlled to the probabilistic state and then executed after the 100th fluctuation (see FIG. 12-6). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player and improve the interest.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 8A) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. The state control means includes an update means capable of updating information (for example, a relief time reduction counter), and the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times of execution of the variable display. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Is updated, and the control of the special state is started based on the predetermined suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined suggestion effect (for example, the advance notice effect) when the variable display is executed and the special condition is satisfied. Further, a special notification effect executing means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect) for notifying the fact is further provided, and the predetermined suggestion effect executing means is a predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect does not change between the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less and the period when the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened is 11 times or more). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest by suddenly executing the special notification effect.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification effect is the special notification effect in the display means. It is an embodiment that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display displayed before the start (for example, blackout at the start of fluctuation). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification effect is an embodiment in which the identification information for the effect is difficult to see (for example). , Black out at the end of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. It is an embodiment in which the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state due to the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any one of the means 1A to the means 4A, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (for example, an explanation regarding a relief time reduction (for example, a relief time reduction function). And display the telop including the explanation of the production in a short relief time)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A, a portion in which a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. ), The variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special notification effect executing means is variable that the special condition is satisfied. After the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the display, the special notification effect can be executed (for example, in the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment is established. Is not used. And after the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, it is notified that the relief time reduction has been established). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, which is a special condition. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, and the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a numerical value updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. It is possible to execute a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and hold information stored by the hold storage means, and an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Numerical information and hold storage updated by the initialization means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) and the storage contents of the backup storage means when the power supply is started. It is provided with a recovery means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the reserved information stored in the means. According to such a configuration, a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the special number of times is stored before the power supply is stopped while optimizing the control by the initialization process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is performed.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, a state of a high base flag) that can be specified to be controlled to a special state, and a special state. Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of the time reduction count counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed, and special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the above and an initialization means (for example, a game control micro) capable of executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A portion where the computer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means is when the backup storage means holds the special state information, the execution count information, and the numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the state of the high base flag and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized, while the value is initialized. The value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before power failure is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1B) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating information and a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. (For example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means corresponds to a special number of times the numerical information updated by the update means is executed as the variable display. By becoming a specific value, it is possible to control the special state when a special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated with, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not. Yes (for example, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) in both the case of big hit and the case of out of order), and the display result of variable display becomes a specific display result. In addition, the rate of determining a specific variable display pattern is higher than that of a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is determined at a high rate in the case of a big hit), and a special condition. In the predetermined period before the establishment of, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the period before the predetermined period (for example, the relief time is shortened). Immediately before becoming, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) at the time of disconnection is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) In means 1B, a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect effect suggesting that a relief time is satisfied, a telop display while waiting for a customer) can be executed. As for the suggestion effect execution means, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is higher in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to establish the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, a telop display including an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation regarding a relief time reduction (for example, an explanation of a relief time reduction function or an effect in a relief time reduction)). ) Is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 3B. The notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. Is higher in the case where the specific display result is obtained than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). The rate of executing the advance notice effect is lower in the period) than in the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 5B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 4B. The notice effect executing means is provided with means, and the specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") is predetermined regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not. When the notice effect can be executed according to the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue") and the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect according to the specific mode is higher than the predetermined mode. When the variable display display result is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is less than the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in a specific mode in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. A variable display pattern determining means (for example) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating information and a special variable display pattern (for example, the first variable display pattern # M (relief time shortening rush loss)). , The part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means is a specific value in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means depends on the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated, and the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and does not determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied, but is specially variable. Further provided is a specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect) for notifying that the variable display by the display pattern is being executed to be controlled to a special state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification effect executing means executes the specific notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display that is possible and the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is performed after performing the effect in the same manner as the specific notification effect. It is provided with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a time-saving rushing masquerade effect) for notifying that is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, once the player recognizes the establishment of the special condition, it is notified that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest is improved. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the variable display is not executed before the special condition is satisfied. A predetermined notification effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, full rotation effect) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the embodiment is provided. According to such a configuration, the player can be given a surprising and special feeling, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode common to that before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the jackpot is the same as when the value is not 0. It is realized by being determined by the fluctuation pattern). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the variable display display result when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect (for example, shortening the relief time) for notifying that the control of the special state is started in the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, which is longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is provided with a notification effect execution means capable of executing a mode transition effect) for notifying that the control of the time saving state is started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) At the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied in any of the means 1C to the means 5C, a specific signal corresponding to the start of the display period (for example, a fluctuation stop signal). Is output, and after the specific signal is output, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state is provided. According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent signal omission from occurring externally.

(Means 7C) In the means 6C, the signal output means extends the period until the next variation is started, which is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. A special signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process). According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent signal omission from occurring externally.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passage region (for example, a first start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, a left-handed route) can pass. ), A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second as a variable display of identification information. 1 Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of the start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition, and a special route. A special output that can specify that the game medium should be fired at the target (for example, the output of a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which the player is expected to hit right, or right-handed. The first starting condition is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium through the first passing region, and the second starting condition is the first. 2 It is established based on the passage of the game medium through the passing area, and the special output means is a special process (for example, the next variation) executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. The special output can be executed at the start of the next variable deferral process to extend the period until the start of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. It is provided with an updating means capable of updating information and a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process). The state control means can control the numerical information updated by the update means to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, and the update means can be used. , The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means is special when a special condition is satisfied. A variable display pattern (for example, the first variation pattern # A) that can be determined even before the condition is satisfied is determined, and a non-specific display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. A special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, display of a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction) for notifying that the control of the special state is started after the display is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable display pattern can be standardized when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A). A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met, and hold storage. A look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means (for example, an effect that stops and displays a special decorative pattern (chance eye), or a hold change effect that changes the color or shape of the hold display. , A zone effect that displays a special background, etc.) is provided, and the look-ahead notice execution means is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. While it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display when a special condition is satisfied, the execution of a look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display after the variable display that satisfies a special condition is restricted ( For example, execution of a look-ahead notice effect for which the hold memory stored before reaching the change in the relief time reduction and the hold memory corresponding to the change performed after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is targeted for advance notice. (Prohibit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control process from becoming complicated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of contradiction in the production contents.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect can be executed. Is an embodiment in which the background display in the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state due to the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to means 3D, suggestion effects related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, countdown effects and effect effects suggesting that relief time is shortened, telop display while waiting for customers, etc.) are performed. A feasible suggestion effect execution means is provided, and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to the means 4D, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation of a rescue time saving function or a relief time shortening effect). Includes telop display). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E) may be applied to the feature unit 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and is based on a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and variable display is executed. A variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating numerical information and a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. The display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process) is provided, and the state control means is based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the special condition is satisfied because the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, which can be controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state. It can be controlled to a special state, and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means. Is a shortened variable display when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The rate of determining the pattern is high (for example, the rate of determining the variation pattern with the shortened fluctuation time is higher in the time-saving state via the rescue time reduction than in the time-saving state via the jackpot). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display being executed by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. Will be shortened, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and is based on a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and variable display is executed. A variable display pattern determination that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including an update means capable of updating numerical information and a specific variable display pattern (for example, the first variable display pattern # C) corresponding to the execution of the reach effect. The state control means includes means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means is in an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to, and the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state is set when the special condition is satisfied. It is controllable, the updating means updates the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means is special. The special state controlled when the condition is satisfied is determined to be the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, the time saving state via the rescue time saving is determined to be a fluctuation pattern that reaches (or the reach with particularly high expectation) when the display result is out of order than the time saving state via the jackpot. The percentage is low). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number of times, the ratio of the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result becomes low, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In the means 1E, a background display means capable of displaying different background displays in the display means depending on the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the background image is different between the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or the means 2E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A). And a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. , A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) for a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is provided. The means is a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, a ratio of executing a look-ahead notice effect, and any of a plurality of types of look-ahead notice. The ratio of whether to execute the effect is different (for example, the ratio of executing the look-ahead advance notice effect and the execution of any of a plurality of types of the look-ahead advance notice effect depending on the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction and the time reduction state via the jackpot. It is different from the ratio of doing). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the look-ahead notice effect are determined between the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be different and can improve the interest.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to the means 3E, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, and the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer or a second hold storage number buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a variable corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Pre-reading notice effect that targets the display (for example, effect that stops and displays a special decorative pattern (chance eye), hold change effect that changes the color and shape of the hold display, zone effect that performs a special background display, etc.) The pre-reading notice executing means is provided with a look-ahead notice executing means, and the look-ahead notice executing means gives a notice of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied. While the target look-ahead notice effect can be executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is restricted (for example, before the change in the relief time reduction is reached). It is a stored hold memory, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold memory corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is restricted (prohibited). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process and to avoid contradiction in the production contents.

It is possible to appropriately combine the configuration shown by the feature unit 120IW with the configuration shown by the feature unit 090IW, the feature unit 113IW, and the feature unit 116IW. For example, when the configuration shown by the feature unit 090IW is applied to the configuration shown by the feature unit 120IW, the value of the small hit count counter is subtracted by 1 when a small hit is obtained with a V prize during the time saving state. Then, while the time saving state is terminated, if a small hit without V prize is obtained during the time saving state, the value of the small hit count counter may not be subtracted.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) when it is played, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a portion for executing step 100IWS173, and as shown in FIG. 8-19, step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 is executed. A portion), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13). The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, shown in FIGS. 8-13). As shown in the part where the game control computer 100 executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, the part where the game control computer 100 executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173), the updating means is , The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-13, the game control microcomputer. (Part of executing step 100 IWS71 in 100),
Moreover,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 23-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 23-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 23-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), and a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, it can be suitably controlled in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

That is, since the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, for example, the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information Since it is easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than when the numerical information is updated only when one of the variable displays of is executed, it is possible to increase the motivation for playing. At the same time, the specific effect can be executed with a small amount of data, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being lowered when the specific effect is executed. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a specific effect with a small amount of data without deteriorating the visibility of the display image of the game-related information without deteriorating the game interest when installed in the amusement park. ..

Further, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design, and it is possible to execute a specific effect with a small amount of data and prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being deteriorated. As an example, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 23-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 23-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 23-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), and a gaming machine. An example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
FIG. 13 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold display 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 15). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 13, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 15), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 13, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 13), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 15).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 15).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning has occurred, but it is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control the game state, the game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it may be determined whether or not the recovery condition can be satisfied by confirming or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the recovery process (step S904) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. By the recovery process in step S904, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), the setting change process (step S907) is executed after the initialization process (step S906) is executed. The initialization process of step 90S6 includes a clear process for clearing a flag, a counter, and a buffer stored in the RAM 102, and an initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S906. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S906 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and interrupts are permitted (step S9010). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 17 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 16 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 19B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 19A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 19 (A).

As shown in FIG. 19B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 19 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and the "missing time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values which can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 21 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature Unit 006SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a design) and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 23-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 23-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 23-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modification 006SG-1). It is possible to execute an effect, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a look-ahead notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, only the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image are used, and the display position of the specific image is changed from the first position to the first position. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing it at two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be suppressed as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed using the dedicated image data. ..

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information is not displaced together with at least a part of the specific image, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is an image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Duplicate display),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displacement specific image, so that the player feels uncomfortable. You can recognize game-related information without any problem.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in a region that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display region (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is a left region 006SG005L, a middle region 006SG005C, and a right region during the development suggestion effect. The part displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of the area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so that the player can accurately perform the game. Can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the second and fourth embodiments.
A game identification information variable display executing means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing variable display of game identification information (for example, special symbol) is provided. ,
The effect executing means is
In the first area in the display area, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-21, the image display device 5 In the central part of the display area, the part where variable display of decorative symbols can be executed according to the variable display of special symbols),
In the second area in the display area, which is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, it is possible to execute the variable display of the reduced identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 23-21, in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion capable of performing variable display of a small symbol according to variable display of a special symbol).
The display image of the effect identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and the visual state is changed from the first visual state to the second visual state, which is less visible to the player than the first visual state, according to the execution of the specific effect. The decorative symbol changes to a state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 and 23-23, the decorative symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed. The part where visibility is reduced by moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visual state does not change from the first visual state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 23-21 and 23-23 are shown. As described above, the small symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbol, it does not move from the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the identification information for the effect from the first visual state to the second visual state by the execution of the specific effect, and the effect is reduced by the execution of the specific effect. Since the visual recognition state of the identification information does not change from the first visual recognition state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 23-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 23-31). 006SG005B), including
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. It is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, a portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image). As shown in 23-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When the relative position between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displaced, the first specific display area and the first specific display area are located at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 An effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, the cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIGS. 23-31) is displayed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player more effectively recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The effect executing means can displace the first specific display area in the first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect, and the second specific can be used. The display area can be displaced toward the second direction opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-31 (D), the upper area 006SG005T is on the right side and the lower area 006SG005B is on the left side. A portion to be moved toward the direction, or a portion to move the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward as shown in FIG. 23-31 (E)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as a specific effect, the displacement of the specific image to the second position is the second direction opposite to the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the first direction of the second specific display area. By executing it as a displacement in the direction, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh embodiment.
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are used as pre-reading notice effects. When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth and eighth embodiments.
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is a decoration. The part that is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the design or background image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the display position of the specific image is displaced as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, the displacement of the display position of the specific image is made more conspicuous by comparing these specific images with the effect image. It is possible to further improve the effect of a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to nine embodiments.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect executing means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors of blue and red, and a portion thereof. As shown in FIGS. 23-33, the part where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display mode the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-30, the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in any color. The part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on the color, or the part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed as shown in FIGS. 23-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth forms.
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-21, it is displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG. The part where the amount of movement of the image is gradually increased, and as shown in FIGS. 23-27, the decorative design inside is gradually expanded in the revival production of the modified example 006SG-2. As shown in Fig. 23-35, the part where the amount of movement of the fragments constituting the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image is gradually large in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5. The part that goes to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the specific image step by step.

The gaming machine of the form 12 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position toward the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-21, the development suggestion of the feature unit 006SG. In the production, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 23-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are stepwise from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral edge portion of the display area. The moving part, the part where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the displacement from the first position to the second position of the specific image in the specific effect can be emphasized, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment.
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-28, a portion in which the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments).
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces is gradually increased (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are the progress of the revival effect. The part that gradually increases according to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to strongly impress the player with a specific effect by the visual effect that the image pieces gradually increase.

The gaming machine of the form 14 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased (for example, in the hot water shown in FIG. 1-28, in the revival effect, the image display device 5 is used. The part where the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area gradually increases),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively attracted to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 11 to 14.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The storage means can store a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display position displacement information the specific image is displaced from (for example, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the left region 006SG005L, While the displacement image data for sliding the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R to the third stage is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area are used. Since the displacement image data for sliding the image of 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion effect. Part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 15th embodiments.
The plurality of display position displacement information is the first display position change information (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-21, super reach) in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are displacement image data for sliding movement to the third stage), and the specific image is from the first aspect to the first aspect. The second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-22, in the variable display with the normal reach displacement pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are the first stage. Or data for displacement image for sliding to the second stage), including
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change portion in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. As shown in 23-21 and FIG. 23-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, In the case of using the displacement image data in which the image of the right region 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the portion where the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage is common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. When the displacement image data is used, the part where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect as the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the 17th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. It is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, a portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image). As shown in 23-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, shown in FIGS. 23-31 (D) and 23-31 (E)). (A portion in which the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved to the left side, and then the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the effect of the specific effect can be enhanced. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment.
The boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. Displaceable in the direction (eg, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (D) and 23-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the upper part. The boundary between the area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is a part that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of the form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 18.
At least in the specific display layer, the image can be arranged over the area corresponding to the display area and the area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-39, the promotion effect is executed. The decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is moved out of the display area of the image display device 5. Placement part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when a displacement specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display is performed in the display area.
In the modified example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when the promotion effect (specific effect) is executed, the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying a displacement image to the whole, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 19.
The effect executing means can enlarge the image displayed in the display area during the period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, depending on the progress of the promotion effect). The part that gradually enlarges the decorative pattern drawn / placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / placed in the layer 3 image drawing area),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area in the process of displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the effect of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example,). As shown in the modification 006SG-3, the part where the image manually displayed in the upper region 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B are different),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area is displayed. It is the same (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side). At least part of the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give unexpectedness to a specific effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to the form 21 or the form 22.
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are not displayed in the area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect). A part of the image displayed over is not displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the production interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 23rd forms.
The display means can display a stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'. Is a part where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image) can be displayed),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect for displaying the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-45 (B), a portion where the notice effect during variable display can be displayed on the stereoscopic image).
When the specific effect is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-45 (D), when the development suggestion effect is executed, the development is performed. The part where the image displayed as a suggestion effect is displayed as a stereoscopic image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic effect, and the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific effect, so that the specific effect can be suitably carried out.

The gaming machine of the form 25 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 24.
The image for the right eye and the image for the left eye are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the stereoscopic effect can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to the 24th or 25th form.
The effect executing means can execute the stereoscopic effect as an introduction effect of the specific effect in a period before the execution period of the specific effect during variable display.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the specific effect is executed by executing the stereoscopic effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 23-1, the effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives the effect control command via the input circuit 260. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control of the image display device 5 such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 on the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 based on the effect control command. Perform the processing to make it.

As shown in FIG. 23-1, the display control unit 123 includes characters (also referred to as image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, and CG data), decorative patterns, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. The first reserved storage display area 006SG005D for displaying the image and the first special figure reserved storage number as game-related information in the feature unit 006SG and the second reserved storage for displaying the second special figure reserved storage number in a identifiable manner. Displayed together with CGROM205 for storing data such as the first interface image 006SG005I for displaying the display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol, and SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received effect control command to the display control unit 123. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and a background image. It is a ROM for storing. The CGROM 205 in the feature unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for shifting the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the displacement target image to be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, the enlargement / reduction ratio, and the like. The attribute register 203 that stores the data that specifies the palette number, coordinates, etc.), the drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of the image to the drawing area described later in the VRAM area, and the CG data stored in the CGROM 205 are stored in the VRAM area. Data transfer control unit 211 that controls transfer, video signals for displaying image data stored in the display image creation area described later in the VRAM area (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the data to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected to the system bus. The image processing DSP 264 is connected. Further, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via the CG bus interface 204. The system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and the attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 202 can be accessed. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus so that the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203 can be accessed.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via the VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

In the system register 202, a system control register for storing instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register for storing interrupt signal output instructions described later, a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register for storing an area and the like, a data transfer register for storing a transfer source address and a transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing a display image creation area in the VRAM area, and the like are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of the V blank (cycle for updating the image), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In the feature unit 006SG, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area allocated as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. In the meantime, drawing is performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 23-2 (a) and 23-2 (b), in the feature unit 006SG, an image for displaying on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. Is being generated. In the VRAM area, a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each of these layers and an image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (combined) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image for the purpose is arranged (see FIG. 23-5). It should be noted that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and the higher the image, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the higher the display priority in the image display device 5. Is set low.

As shown in FIGS. 23-5 (A) and 23-5 (B), a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing / arranging an image of layer 1 and an image of layer 2 are drawn / arranged in the VRAM area. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

In the displacement image creation area, an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area is created as a displacement target image. This is an area for creating a displacement image by applying a displacement image described later to the displacement target image.

In the display image creation area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image (combined) or an image in which an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area are superimposed (combined). This is the area to be created as an image.

The image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image having the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is an image display. An image having a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are the most in the image display device 5. Each image has a low display priority (display priority: low).

That is, layer 1 is an upper layer having the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer having an image display priority lower than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer having the lowest image display priority. It is a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 23-2 (b) and 23-5 (B), in the layer 1 image drawing area, the first special figure reserved storage number is identifiablely displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U for identifiable display of the second reserved storage number, and in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5. This is a drawing area for drawing these images in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbol.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in order to execute variable display of the decorative symbols in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the background image in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 006SG, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (the image of the layer 3), it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) have the highest display priority, and thus are the highest in the image display device 5. Since the image (decorative pattern) displayed as the upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image display device 5 The image (background image) displayed in the middle layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image in the image display device 5 because the display priority is set to the lowest.

The image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area in the feature unit 006SG has a transparency of 0% because the upper layer image makes the overlapping portion of the lower layer image invisible to the player when superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area is set to be higher than 0% depending on the situation, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the above or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a displacement method of the displacement target image in the feature unit 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 23-3 (A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Explaining the pixel A of one of these a plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 is in the displacement target image according to the values of the R value and the G value of the pixel A from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from. Specifically, if the R value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 moves from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the minus direction (left direction) of the X axis. Is specified as the coordinates (position) of the pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is in the plus direction (right direction) of the X-axis. The position moved toward the pixel X is specified as the coordinates in the X-axis direction of the pixel X. The amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the R value.

Further, if the G value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is the coordinate of the pixel X in the Y axis direction. If the G value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the plus direction (upward) of the Y axis is the Y-axis direction of the pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of. The amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the G value.

Then, after the position of the pixel X in the displacement target image is specified, the pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, the pixel X is displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A. That is, in the present feature unit 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and the G value of the pixel A, any pixel X can be displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A, and the R value and the G of the pixel A can be displaced. By adjusting the values to the same value, it is possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to the pixel A, to the position corresponding to the pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23-3 (B), the displacement image has a plurality of regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement) in which the R value and the G value are different from each other. Image d) is configured, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 23-4 (A) to 23-4 (C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the region constituting the displacement image. A displacement image a, an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256, a displacement image b, an R value of any one of 1 to 127, and a G value of 128. A displacement image c, an image d for displacement having an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 is provided, and an image of a triple circle is used as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 23-4 (D), for the displacement image a, in the displacement target image, the range moved downward by the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a is the displacement image. Specify in the display range of. Further, as shown in FIG. 23-4 (E), for the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved above the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify in the range. Further, as shown in FIG. 23-4 (F), for the displacement image c, in the displacement target image, the range moved to the left by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is the displacement image. Specify in the display range. Further, as shown in FIG. 23-4 (G), for the displacement image d, in the displacement target image, the position moved to the right by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is the displacement image. Specify in the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R and G values of the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d is set as the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement. By displacing to the positions of the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 23-4 (H) is generated.

In this feature unit 006SG, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are set to either the R value or the G value as a fixed value, so that the displacement image a, Although the boundaries of the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are clearly separated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement image d are used. It is also possible to generate an image such as a gradation as a displacement image by gradually making the R value and the G value of the pixels near the boundaries of the image c and the displacement image d different from each other.

FIG. 23-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 006SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 23-6 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 23-6 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 23-6 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 23-6 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 23-6 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 23-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 23-7, in the feature unit 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 23-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 006SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 006SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 006SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 23-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 006SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIG. 23-9 (B). In the feature unit 006SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 006SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23-9 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23-9 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 23-10 shows a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 006SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided. The above or only one type may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. As the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit is provided.

As shown in FIG. 23-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 006SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 006SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern. That is, the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set so that the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than that of the super reach α fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in the feature unit 006 are displayed in a variable manner. It is also a fluctuation pattern that executes a development suggestion effect to the reach effect of super reach after the reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2) is displayed. , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of the super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In this feature unit 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed in a variable manner. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the invention is not limited to this. A fluctuation pattern that does not execute the development suggestion effect may be provided. In addition, when the development suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of developing to the reach effect of the super reach may be set higher than the case where the development suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 23-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. It is determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the present feature unit 006SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and different jackpot variation pattern determination tables are provided according to the jackpot type. May be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. Determined from (non-reach off-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β off-off fluctuation pattern) do.

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Numerical data indicating random numbers, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, which are not generated by the random number circuit 104, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 23-1 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area shown in FIG. 23-15 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 006SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold storage number notification command ( The first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer are associated with these start opening winning designation commands and the hold storage number notification commands. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

FIG. 23-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 18 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 23-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 006SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 006SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 23-8 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 006SGS150a). In this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , In the process of step 006SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23-9 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 006SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be selected. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 006SGS155, or when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 23-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 18 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 23-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination in step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state or the time saving state (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS168; Y). Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. The reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified by reading the above, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 006SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 006SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is "missing".

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 006SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 17 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 23-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 18 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 006SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 006SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 006SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 23-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 18 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 006SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 006SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving count counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), by executing step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 006SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control CPU 120 will be described. FIG. 23-16 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22. The effect control CPU 120 has a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) described above is executed in the effect control process process. ) Is executed, and any of the processes of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change processing, for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the start timing of variable display (the timing when the effect control process process is executed while the value of the effect control process flag is set to 1). The change of the background image displayed on the device 5 may be determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%), and the image display device 5 may start displaying a new background image according to the determination. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the effect corresponding to the variable display are executed in the state where any one of the plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5. There is.

When the game state changes in the background image change process (for example, from the normal state to the big hit game state, from the big hit game state to the probable change state or the time saving state, from the probable change state or the time saving state to the big hit state or the normal state). When the state is changed), the background image corresponding to the game state of the change destination may be displayed on the image display device 5.

FIG. 23-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display of the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 is a process timer according to the process table selected by the effect control CPU 120 according to the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the variable display start setting process. The respective values of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer are set to -1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control status for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the contents of the process data set next (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control unit 123 on the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (display switching of the previous decorative symbol). The image data (the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the time point) is created (step 006SGS922). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a variable display of a fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927. Further, it is determined whether or not the display image processing flag described later is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS926, and if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the content of the process data being executed is confirmed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the super reach into the reach effect (step 006SGS925). If it is not the development suggestion start timing for the reach production of the super reach (step 006SGS925; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if it is the development suggestion start timing for the super reach reach production (step 006SGS925; Y), the step 006SGS926 is performed. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the effect control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacement) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to perform a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and step 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the image display device 5 displays a background image, a character image, a decorative pattern, and the like in the variation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 23-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 006SG is positioned in advance so as to be displayed in a part of the background image and the display area. Is the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, the second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in the feature unit 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the left-right width direction and the vertical width direction than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background is in the display area of the image display device 5. The central part of the image in the horizontal width direction is displayed. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are vertically and horizontally wider than the display area of the image display device 5. It is an area for drawing and arranging an image having a long dimension, and in the display area of the image display device 5, only a portion of the image corresponding to the display area is displayed.

In this feature unit 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area. The present invention is not limited to this, and the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are vertically wider than the display area of the image display device 5. While the area for drawing and arranging an image having long dimensions and left-right width dimensions is used, the display image creation area is an image having the same vertical width dimension and left-right width dimension as the display area of the image display device 5. May be used as an image for drawing and arranging. In this case, of the images (background images) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is arranged in the display image creation area to create an image. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

FIG. 23-18 is a flowchart showing the display image processing process (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 23-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). When the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942). When the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), the displacement image data for successful development to the super reach effect (for notification of execution of the super reach effect) is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The image data for displacement in the feature unit 006SG includes an image to be displaced (in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an image in which an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed). This is data in which displacement images for application to (images arranged in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in order in chronological order.

Further, when the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the effect control CPU 120 is for failure to develop into a super reach effect (for non-execution notification of the super reach effect). As the displacement image data, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A or the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In this feature unit 006SG, there are two types of image data for displacement for failure of development to super reach effect: displacement image data of A for failure of development of super reach effect and displacement image data of B for failure of development of super reach effect. Although the embodiment in which the displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for failure to develop into a super reach effect is 3. It may be one or more.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). When the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), when the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is determined (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is selected and the step 006SGS948 is selected. Proceed to (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

When the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes the displacement image drawing process. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 23-5 in the displacement image creation area. A displacement target image may be created by compositing (superimposing), and a process of creating a displacement image may be executed by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether or not the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

When the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process is performed. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-20 to 23-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 23-20 (A) and 23-20 (B), in the feature unit 006SG, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state), the character image and the numerical image are combined as a decorative pattern for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (B), when the gaming state is the time saving state (low accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state), the decoration for the time saving state of only the numerical image is used as the decorative pattern. The design is displayed.

Then, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 (A) and 23-21 (B), the left and right decorative patterns stop swinging by the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 23-21 (C), the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5 is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative symbol in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative symbol on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 (C) to 23-21 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol (indicated as "development!" Shown in FIGS. 23-21 (C) to 23-21 (E)) that informs the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward. The symbol) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

The development notification symbol in the feature unit 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 23-21 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 23-21 (D). Eyes, the third stage shown in FIG. 23-21 (E), and the number increases as the stage progresses.

Then, when the third stage slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the center part of the display area of the image display device 5 (the central part of the middle area 006SG005C) is reached. Development notification The movement of the symbol is completed, and the development of the super reach to reach production is notified.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 23-22 (A) and 23-22 (B), the left and right decorative patterns stop swinging by the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 23-22 (C), the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5 is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative symbol in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative symbol on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23-22 (C) to 23-22 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol for notifying the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward is displayed by moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 23-22 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 23-22 (D). It increases with the eyes and stages.

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first-step slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second-step slide movement is performed. After the execution, as shown in FIG. 23-22 (E), the development suggestion effect is completed without the third stage slide movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 is shown in FIG. 23. The state returns to the state shown in -22 (B), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are stopped at the combination indicating the detachment.

As shown in FIGS. 23-21 (C) to 23-21 (E), the slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the feature unit 006SG. Illustrates a mode in which the number of images increases as the stage progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and slides of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R. The amount of movement may decrease as the stage progresses, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is illustrated as a form in which each image can be moved and displayed in up to three stages. The number of steps for sliding and moving each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 (C) to 23-21 (E), in the feature unit 006SG, the slide direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. The present invention is not limited to this, and the slide direction of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is the middle region 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed in.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state). The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state). ..

As a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 23-23 (A) to 23-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including the small symbol are drawn, and the decorative symbol including the development notification symbol described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer is formed. 3 A background image is drawn in the image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to be displayed on the image display device 5. Images are being created.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 and 23-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and the first interface image 006SG005I are used in both the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Since the second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, it is not subject to displacement. Therefore, the decorative pattern moves toward the upper side or the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, so that the visibility from the player is lowered, while the first interface image 006SG005I is the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the lower part of the display area is maintained at the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is deteriorated. There is no.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 and 23-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image of is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Image data is used. Here, as described above, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is set to have a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion effect.

Further, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern. Since the decorative design of No. slides and moves without being divided, including the character and the number, it is prevented that the development suggestion production is less interesting due to the division of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Only one or two of the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 006SG, the image data for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image and the displacement image data for shifting the display position of the decorative pattern and the background image are obtained. Specific effects that displace the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in feature unit 006SG, reach suggestion effect in variant 006SG-1, revival effect in variant 006SG-2, variant 006SG- Since it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect in 3, the promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6), these specific effects are executed using dedicated data. The amount of data to be stored in the CGROM 205 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, since the feature unit 006SG can display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally, a specific effect is produced depending on the case where each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in the feature unit 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced only by using the data of the displacement image, so that the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be suppressed. In the feature unit 006SG, as game-related information, the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D capable of specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U capable of specifying the second special figure reserved storage number. , And a mode in which a small symbol having a display area smaller than that of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is shortened as the game-related information. A fourth that can identify that a launch promotion display or a variable display that urges the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or the gate 41 by being in a state or a probable change state is being executed. A design or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority, that is, the feature unit 006SG. Since it is a non-target image of the image displacement in the development suggestion effect in, the display position does not shift together with the image of the left region 006SG005L, the image of the right region 006SG005R, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C, which are the target of the displacement, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in visually recognizing game-related information such as the number of reserved special figures and the variable display of small symbols when the effect is executed.

Further, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right region 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Since the display position of the two-interface image 006SG005J itself does not shift, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the second interface image 006SG005J without discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R during the development suggestion production, the player can see the player. The first special figure reserved storage number in the first interface image 006SG005I is accurately displayed without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the hold storage display area 006SG005D and the second hold storage display area 006SG005U that identifiablely displays the number of hold storages in the second special figure.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 and 23-23, the decorative symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative symbol is in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the portion, the visibility is lowered, so that the effect of the development suggestion effect can be improved. Further, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbol even during the execution of the development suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-21, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually increases. While improving the effect of the development suggestion effect, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R at each stage can be emphasized, so that the effect is further improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 and 23-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid to move to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement image for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Because the data for development is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the image data for displacement used in the development suggestion effect, so that the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the production interest of the development suggestion production.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-21 and 23-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are slid to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the second stage. When using the slide-moving displacement image data, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R have the same part where the images slide and move up to the second stage, so the left region 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. Since the player can pay attention to the process such as the number of stages in which the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide and move, the effect of the development suggestion can be further improved.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 23-24 and 23-25 as a modification 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reach during variable display. The reach suggestion effect may be feasible.

The production mode of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-24 and 23-25. First, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, as shown in FIGS. 23-24 (A) to 23-24 (C), the left decoration is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decoration symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the symbol, and the decorative symbol on the left stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 23-24 (D) to 23-24 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol acts on the right. The decorative pattern stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is distorted and displayed.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the non-reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 23-25 (A) to 23-25 (C), the left decorative symbol is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decorative symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 23-25 (D) to 23-25 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, but the right The number of symbols that do not match the reach as decorative symbols of is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is displayed without distortion.

As a reach suggestion effect in the present modification 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 23-26 (A) to 23-26 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In the present modification 006SG-1, a mode in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display of fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The reach suggestion effect may not be executed in a part of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, as a reach suggestion effect, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion effect in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach, the case where the action image acts on the decorative symbol only once (only acts on the decorative symbol on the left) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach suggestion effects are provided. The action image of the above may be displayed, and the reach ratio may be different depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, in the case where the reach is not achieved even though the action image of the character or the like acts as the reach suggestion effect, the acted decorative pattern or the background image in which the display area overlaps with the decorative symbol is displayed. Although a form in which a part is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the action image is always applied regardless of whether or not it becomes reach. It is also possible to distort a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern on which the above acts and the decorative pattern and the display area overlap.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts and a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern and the display area overlap are distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative symbol on which the action image acts overlaps with the decorative symbol and the display area. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature unit 213SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 23-27 and 23-28 as a modified example 006SG-2, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed by a combination of detachment is displayed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that changes into a combination of big hits.

The production mode of the revival effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-27 and 23-28. First, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 23-27 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of reach as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern reaches. It is oscillated by the combination of off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-27 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative symbol inside, and a plurality of decorative symbols inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is divided and displayed in pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-27 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 23-27 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-27 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 23-27 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image is finally displayed in which fragments of the decorative design inside are scattered so as to diffuse, and then a new decorative design indicating that the decorative design inside is a big hit is displayed. The variable display stops.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 23-28 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. It is oscillated by the combination of reach off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-28 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative symbol inside, and a plurality of decorative symbols inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is divided and displayed in pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-28 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 23-28 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-28 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 23-28 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

However, in the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, The revival effect is completed without executing the crack in the fourth stage, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIGS. 23-28 (A), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

As a revival effect in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 23-29 (A) to 23-29 (F), the first hold storage display is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and the crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to obtain the displacement image (middle). An image in which the decorative pattern of is divided into a plurality of fragments and each fragment is displayed so as to be diffused) is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in the present modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside is gradually expanded as the revival effect, that is, in the revival effect, the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 Is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively focused on the revival effect by gradually expanding the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern.

In the present modification 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is duplicated and displayed on the decorative pattern inside is illustrated as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit may be different depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 23-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a big hit, blue cracks are performed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed, and the red crack effect is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In the present modification 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H is not limited to this. Three or more colors may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode in which the revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The revival effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 23-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection effect, and the number of these fragments is maintained according to the progress of the resurrection effect. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design in these is not limited to the embodiment in which these fragments are moved stepwise from the central portion to the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5. The plurality of constituent fragments may be gradually increased according to the progress of the resurrection effect. By doing so, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the revival effect by the visual effect that the number of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside increases as the revival effect progresses.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 23-31 as a modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, variable display is executed in the hold storage with a fluctuation pattern of super reach. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that the variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit is executed from the variable display multiple times before.

The production mode of the look-ahead notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (A) and 23-31 (B), in a state where a plurality of reserved storages exist, the variable display during execution is stopped by a combination of off the decorative symbols. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (C) and 23-31 (D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect crossing the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image 006SG005S is displayed in duplicate with respect to the decorative pattern and the background image. Then, of the display area displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the lower lower area 006SG005B including a part of the decorative pattern and the background image with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a boundary and the rest. It is divided into an upper upper area 006SG005T including a decorative pattern and a background image. That is, the boundary portion between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (D) to 23-31 (E), the lower region 006SG005B is on the left side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T is on the right side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide and move toward at the same time. Then, the lower region 006SG005B that slides to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides downward, and the upper region 006SG005T that slides to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides upward. .. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed so as to follow both the boundary portion on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary portion on the upper region 006SG005T side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (E) and 23-31 (F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B is slid downward and the upper area 006SG005T is slid upward. Starts displaying a black image. The display area of the black image expands according to the progress of the downward slide movement of the lower region 006SG005B and the upward slide movement of the upper region 006SG005T, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T move out of the display area. By completing the movement, only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed in the display area, which is a so-called blackout state.

After that, when the blackout ends, the display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. The pre-reading notice effect is repeatedly executed until the start of the variable display of the external pre-reading target.

As a look-ahead notice effect in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 23-32 (A) to 23-32 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-3, there is a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing an image further below. Have been placed. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in the present modification 006SG-3, in the look-ahead notice effect as the specific effect in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (C) and 23-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower part are shown. A decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left side, respectively, at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. Since the disconnection effect image 006SG005S is displayed, the player can more effectively recognize the movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B as the look-ahead notice effect to the left and right sides. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or the background image. Even if the display position of the area 006SG005B is displaced, the display position of the cut effect image 006SG005S is not displaced. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (D) and 23-31 (E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region are further moved. By moving the boundary portion with 006SG005B toward the upper side and the lower side, respectively, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In particular, as a look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (D) and 23-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left side, but the upper region 006SG005T. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005B and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary portion further enhances the effect of the look-ahead notice effect. Can be done.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving direction of the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It suffices if it is different from either one.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and variable display of the look-ahead target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result in is a big hit may be different.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 23-33, three types of colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the look-ahead target is a big hit, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is used. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the look-ahead target is out of alignment, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 10%. Just do it.

By doing so, the player can pay attention to the display color of the disconnection effect image 006SG005S displayed during the look-ahead notice effect, so that the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced.

In the present modification 006SG-3, a form in which three kinds of colors of blue, green, and red are provided as display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect is not limited thereto. The display color of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Further, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the display number of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and other aspects other than the color. ..

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two regions along the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. The pre-reading notice effect is not limited, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas. In this case, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect may be improved by changing the slide movement direction of each area.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited thereto. The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the left side. It is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different from each other, so that the pre-reading notice effect is produced. It can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

In the present modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side are different. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side. At least a part of the image may be common. By doing so, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pre-reading notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 23-31 (C) and 23-31 (D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. The image displayed over the 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed over the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. It is not necessary that a part of the image is displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production of the look-ahead notice production.

In this modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect (in FIG. 23-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved. The amount of movement (displacement) between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same when the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. 23-31 (E). Is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of movement (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B when the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect. ) May be different. In this way, by making the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in the opposite directions as the look-ahead notice effect different, different, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 23-33, a mode in which the ratio of the variable display result of the look-ahead target to be a big hit is different depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. Is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 23-34 as a modification 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed for each variable display execution. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 23-35 as a modification example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a non-probability change jackpot or a two-round probability change with a small number of rounds is performed during the variable display. A combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed in the same state as the combination that indicates the jackpot, and finally stopped. You may execute a promotion effect (also called a re-lottery effect) to notify the jackpot type.

The production mode of the promotion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-35. First, after notifying that the variable display result is a big hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIG. 23-35 (A), after the end of these reach effects, the decorative design is changed to a non-probable big hit or a two-round probability change. It is displayed as a combination indicating a jackpot type having a relatively low advantage for a player such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 23-35 (A), a combination of even "2" indicating a non-probability variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are used as a promotion effect, such as a 2-round probability variation jackpot, a 5-round probability variation jackpot, and a 10-round probability variation jackpot. Variable display at a constant speed will be performed in a state that includes combinations of decorative patterns of other jackpot types.

During the execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 23-35 (C) and 23-35 (D), the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 faces to the left in two steps. And distort.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type (see FIG. 23-35 (A)) indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first. In some cases, after the distortion of the first stage or the second stage of the promotion effect, the decorative symbol stops at the combination of the jackpot type (the combination of the probability variation jackpot in the example shown in FIGS. 23-35 (E)). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbol is the decorative symbol after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at the combination of big hit types (the combination of non-probable variable big hits in the example shown in FIG. 23-35 (F)).

In this modification 006SG-5, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types is controlled to whether or not the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to those with different variable display times and those with different numbers of rounds in big hit games.

As a promotion effect in the present modification 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 23-36 (A) to 23-36 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage display. A first interface image 006SG005I including an area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the central portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is created.

The display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modification 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the horizontal width direction and the vertical width direction like the feature unit 006SG. (See FIG. 23-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 23-37, the dimensions of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction are images. It may be the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. 23-38 (A) to 23-38 (C), the promotion effect is in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5. When the central portion is distorted toward the left side, an image non-display portion in which no image is displayed is formed in the right portion of the display area.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 23-37, when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5, FIG. 23 As shown in −39 (A) to FIG. 23-39 (D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn. By enlarging the arranged background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image is moved out of the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. By doing so, by applying the displacement image to the image to be displaced, even if the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, the right portion of the image display device 5 Since the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed due to the enlargement, the image display device 5 is inappropriate because the above-mentioned image non-display portion is formed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the display will be displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 23-39, when the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, no image is displayed on the right portion of the display area. Although an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image non-display portion is formed. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the displacement image is applied to the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying it, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is the display of the image display device 5. It is not necessary to displace only the part corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. By enlarging the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the image non-display portion is formed during the promotion effect. The embodiment is illustrated to prevent the image from being drawn, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn / arranged. The enlargement of the background image may be performed stepwise according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, the decorative pattern and the background image are suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5, so that a sense of discomfort can be reduced. Therefore, the display area of the image display device 5 can be displayed while maintaining the effect of the promotion effect. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as the image non-display portion being displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the reach effect of the super reach can be executed during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is in progress. In, it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect including a temporary stop of a decorative symbol and a revariable display, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) may be different according to the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In particular, in the variable display for executing such a pseudo-continuous effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol, or a temporary stop suggestion effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute a temporary stop notification effect for notifying the temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion is performed in advance in the CGROM 205. An image having a size larger than the display area of the image display device 5 as an image for effect (at least the left-right width dimension is longer than the left-right width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of this modification 006SG-5) is stored. However, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed. In this case, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of the present modification 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. An image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) may be arranged adjacent to the display image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the displayed image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other over the display area and the non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image non-display portion is replaced. Therefore, a part of the non-display image will be displayed.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 23-40 to 23-42 as a modification 006SG-6, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5. You may do it.

The production mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-40. First, as shown in FIG. 23-40 (A), when a certain period of time elapses from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and reach. After that, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative symbol, moves from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ripple effect image 006SG005P so as to converge from the peripheral portion of the display area toward the central portion of the display area, and at the same time, the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background image) are displayed distorted.

When the variable display is a variable display for executing a pseudo-ream effect (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and as shown in FIG. 23-40 (B). , The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporary stop and the pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in which the pseudo-ream effect is not executed (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol does not temporarily stop), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as it is, as shown in FIGS. 23-40 (C). The image display device 5 is moved to the lower part of the display area to be hidden, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is out of alignment is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In this modification 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 23-40, a form suggesting that the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5 is provided. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. The ratio at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different accordingly.

For example, in FIG. 23-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (doublely displayed) as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect, but as shown in FIGS. 23-41, a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. Is provided, and the rate at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect.

In this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the decorative symbol, that is, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the variable display even in a period other than the pseudo-ream effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol different from the decorative symbol and may be a special symbol displayed only during the pseudo-continuous production.

As shown in FIGS. 23-42 (A) and 23-42 (B), the temporary stop notification effect is the ripple effect image 006SG005P after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The image is displayed so as to diffuse from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral portion of the display area, and the surrounding image (left and right decorative patterns and background image) of the ripple effect image 006SG005P is distorted. Is displayed.

As the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 23-43 (A) to 23-43 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is used. The first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and the ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. It is drawn, and a decorative symbol including a pseudo-continuous symbol is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image (ripple) is applied to the displacement target image. The effect image 006SG005P creates a distorted decorative pattern and a background image).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

Further, the feature unit 006GS exemplifies a form in which an effect image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only a stereoscopic image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 006SG-. As shown in FIGS. 23-44 and 23-45 as FIG. 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

The modified example 006SG-7 will be described below. In the above-mentioned feature unit 006SG and the modified example, a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a plan view image (2D image) is used as the image display device 5. However, in the present modification 006SG-7, as shown in FIGS. 23-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5 that allows the player to visually recognize the stereoscopic image with the naked eye by the paralux barrier method. The feature is that by using ‘’, it is possible to display a stereoscopic image (3D image) in addition to a planar view image (2D image) as various images.

As shown in FIGS. 23-44, the naked-eye liquid crystal image display device 5'of this modification 006SG-7 is a liquid crystal image (video) composed of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image). The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying the image, the backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. It has a structure having a 006SG900 and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

In the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the player's left eye visually recognizes the right-eye image (R image) displayed in a vertically long strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the player's right eye displays the left-eye image (L image). It has a vertical striped black portion that serves as a shutter for preventing the player from visually recognizing, and a transparent portion that enables the player's right eye to visually recognize the image for the right eye and the player's left eye to visually recognize the image for the left eye. A liquid crystal with relatively high light transparency that enables a parallax barrier image display state for displaying a parallax barrier image and a transmissive state in which all pixels are transparent parts without vertical striped black parts. It is said to be a panel.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( A plan view image (2D image) can also be displayed by setting the display to full transparency.

That is, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7 is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to the non-stereoscopic image (2D image). It is possible to display a stereoscopic image with the naked eye.

The stereoscopic image composed of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the above-mentioned layers in the same manner as the plan view image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel. The disparity barrier image displayed on the 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', another effect is stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may be made feasible by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIGS. 23-45 (A) to 23-45 (D), during the variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5'moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. The development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward are displayed, can be executed, and the execution period of the development suggestion effect is long. As a non-overlapping notice effect, a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is executed, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display notice effect.

That is, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the image of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward, which are the displacement specific images, are displayed. In this case, only the stereoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and the image of the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward as described above, which are displacement specific images, are displayed, the display is non-stereoscopic. By making it a planar image (2D image) which is an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to the stereoscopic image, and the interest of the production is lowered. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effect of displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward, which are the displacement specific images, and the middle region 006SG005C moved downward. Since the execution period is different from the development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the image of is displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed in the same effect, the stereoscopic image (3D) is displayed during the display of the displacement specific image. To prevent the image) from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can specify that the displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is based on the data. The display of may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, a predetermined period before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image is completed. Even during the period, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5'using a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging type autostereoscopic image display device other than the parallax barrier method.

In the present modification 006SG0-7, a form in which the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stereoscopic view is also performed in the development suggestion effect. A case may be provided in which an image (3D image) is displayed. When displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) even in the exhibition suggestion effect, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) is drawn, and the planar view image (2D image) is drawn. It may be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be arranged. By doing so, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is preferably displayed in the development suggestion effect. can do.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-7, as an effect of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Although the form that can be executed in a period is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the introduction effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is performed in the period before the development suggestion effect (specific effect). A stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be performed. The production effect of can be further improved. Furthermore, a plurality of production modes of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) are provided, and the practice mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be set according to which effect mode the introduction effect is executed. It may be different.

Further, in the introduction effect, the movable body 32 is operated, and the operation of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the effect of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect). May be improved.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 23-46 as a modification 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (first interface image 006SG005I or second interface in the feature unit 006SG). (Corresponding to image 006SG005J), the payout display of medals, the display of the number of remaining games of AT (assist time), the medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the effect image, and these game-related information is displayed. It may be a non-target image of displacement.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, as a specific effect of the present invention, an effect of changing or distorting (distorting) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a specific effect, changes and distortions in the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be repeatedly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention. As these specific effects, a plurality of effects may be executed. In the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (character and number) is not divided, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into a plurality of fragments or display areas, such as a revival effect or a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the fact that the decorative pattern including the character and the number is not divided in the normal state, and conversely, in the time saving state, the decorative pattern containing only the number is displayed. By dividing, the effect of a specific effect can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in a normal state and the decorative pattern is composed only of numbers in a time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The display mode of the decorative symbol may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variable pattern such as the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach. For example, in the variable display of Super Reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol composed of characters and numbers is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and the decorative symbol composed of only the numbers is executed in the period after the reach. The variable display of is performed. Further, in the period after the reach, as the specific effect in the present invention, it is sufficient to enable the effect of dividing the decorative pattern such as the revival effect.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction is displayed as a displacement specific image on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of a specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement / reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 23-3 and 23-4, the R value and the G value of the displacement target image correspond to the R value and the G value of the displacement target image from the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image. An embodiment in which a displacement image is generated in a replacement method in which a pixel X is specified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) at a position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, in the displacement target image, the displacement image is moved by a method (movement method) in which the pixel X at the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image is moved to the position corresponding to the R value and the G value of the pixel A. It may be generated. In the replacement method, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the region close to the boundary portion to the displacement image considering the width of the boundary portion of the region having a different movement direction as in the modified example 006SG-3. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, since it is not necessary to edit these, the load of creating an image can be reduced, and when an effect image or the like is placed at the boundary, the boundary where the effect image is placed is set. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the load of creating images including effect images can be reduced.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state when the specific display result is derived and displayed.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
It is equipped with an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times.
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.
Moreover,
A display means that has a display area capable of displaying an image and can display a display image of game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area.
A storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and a storage means.
An image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers. ,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area,
Equipped with
The storage means can store display position displacement information for shifting a display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position to a second position different from the first position.
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images